TW200525375A - Wireless LAN protocol stack - Google Patents

Wireless LAN protocol stack Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW200525375A
TW200525375A TW93131486A TW93131486A TW200525375A TW 200525375 A TW200525375 A TW 200525375A TW 93131486 A TW93131486 A TW 93131486A TW 93131486 A TW93131486 A TW 93131486A TW 200525375 A TW200525375 A TW 200525375A
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
layer
feedback
mac
pdus
pdu
Prior art date
Application number
TW93131486A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TWI383302B (en
Inventor
John W Ketchum
J Rodney Walton
Sanjiv Nanda
Original Assignee
Qualcomm Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Qualcomm Inc filed Critical Qualcomm Inc
Publication of TW200525375A publication Critical patent/TW200525375A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI383302B publication Critical patent/TWI383302B/en

Links

Landscapes

  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
  • Communication Control (AREA)

Abstract

Embodiments addressing MAC processing for efficient use of high throughput systems are disclosed. In one aspect, a protocol stack is disclosed comprising one or more of the following: an adaptation layer, a data link control layer, a physical layer, and a layer manager. In another aspect, physical layer feedback is used for adaptation layer processing. In one embodiment, physical layer feedback i; used for segmentation. In another embodiment, physical layer feedback is used for multicast mapping onto one or more unicast channels. In another aspect, a data unit for transmission from a first station to a second station comprises zero or more complete sub-data units, zero or one partial sub-data units from a prior transmission, and zero or one partial sub-data units to fill the data unit. In one embodiment, a pointer may be used to indicate the location of any complete sub-data units.

Description

% I 200525375 九、發明說明: 依據35 U.S.C. §119主張優先權 本專利申請案要求下列美國臨時專利申請案之優先權: 2003年10月15日提出之臨時專利申請案號60/511,750, 標題為「Method and Apparatus for Providing Interoperability and Backward Compatibility in Wireless Communication Systems」; 2003年10月15日提出之臨時專利申請案號60/511,904, 標題為「Method, Apparatus,and System for Medium Access Control in a High Performance Wireless LAN Environment」; 2003年10月21日提出之臨時專利申請案號60/5 1 3,239 ,標題為「Peer-to-Peer Connections in ΜΙΜΟ WEAN System」; 2003年12月1曰提出之臨時專利申請案號60/526,347, 標題為「Method,Apparatus,and System for Sub-Network Protocol Stack for Very High Speed Wireless LAN」; 2003年12月1曰提出之臨時專利申請案號 60/526,356, 標題為「Method,Apparatus,and System for Multiplexing% I 200525375 IX. Description of the invention: Claim priority under 35 USC §119 This patent application claims priority from the following US provisional patent applications: Provisional patent application number 60 / 511,750 filed on October 15, 2003, entitled "Method and Apparatus for Providing Interoperability and Backward Compatibility in Wireless Communication Systems"; provisional patent application number 60 / 511,904 filed on October 15, 2003, entitled "Method, Apparatus, and System for Medium Access Control in a High Performance Wireless LAN Environment "; provisional patent application number 60/5 1 3,239 filed on October 21, 2003, entitled" Peer-to-Peer Connections in ΜΙΜΟ WEAN System "; provisional patent application filed on December 1, 2003 Case No. 60 / 526,347, entitled "Method, Apparatus, and System for Sub-Network Protocol Stack for Very High Speed Wireless LAN"; provisional patent application No. 60 / 526,356 filed on December 1, 2003, entitled "Method , Apparatus, and System for Multiplexing

Protocol data Units in a High Performance Wireless LAN Environment」; 2003年12月23曰提出之臨時專利申請案號 60/532,791,標題為「Wireless Communications Medium Access Control (MAC) Enhancements」; 2004年2月18日提出之臨時專利申請案號60/545,963, 標題為「Adaptive Coordination Function(ACF)」; 2004年6月2日提出之臨時專利申請案號60/576,545,標 96870.doc - 6 - 200525375 題為「Method and Apparatus for Robust Wireless Network」; 2004年6月8日提出之臨時專利申請案號60/586,841,標 題為「Method and Apparatus for Distribution Communication Resources Among Multiple Users」;及 2004年8月11日提出之臨時專利申請案號60/600,960,標 題為「Method,Apparatus,and System for Wireless Communications」; 彼等專利申請案都已讓渡給與與本專利申請相同的受讓 人,並且以引用方式明確併入本文中。 【發明所屬之技術領域】 本發明廣泛係關於通信領域,具體而言,本發明係關於 無線區域網路(LAN)協定堆集。 【先前技術】 無線通信系統被廣泛部署以提供諸如語音、資料的各種 通信類型。典型無線資料系統或網路提供多使用者存取一 或多個共用資源。系統可使用各種多重存取技術,如分頻 多工(Frequency Division Multiplexing ; FDM)、分時多工 Time Division Multiplexing ; TDM)及分碼多工(Code Division Multiplexing ; CDM),及其它。 示例之無線網路包括蜂巢式資料系統。下列是數項此類 實例:(1)「雙模寬頻展頻蜂巢式系統的TIA/EIA-95-B行 動台-基地台相容性標準」(TIA/EIA-95-B Mobile Station-Base Station Compatibility Standard for Dual-Mode Wideband Spread Spectrum Cellular System,即 IS-95標準); (2)名為「第三代合夥專案」(3rd Generation Partnership 96870.doc 200525375Protocol data Units in a High Performance Wireless LAN Environment "; provisional patent application number 60 / 532,791 filed on December 23, 2003, entitled" Wireless Communications Medium Access Control (MAC) Enhancements "; filed on February 18, 2004 Provisional Patent Application No. 60 / 545,963, entitled "Adaptive Coordination Function (ACF)"; Provisional Patent Application No. 60 / 576,545 filed on June 2, 2004, marked 96870.doc-6-200525375 entitled "Method and Apparatus for Robust Wireless Network "; provisional patent application number 60 / 586,841 filed on June 8, 2004, entitled" Method and Apparatus for Distribution Communication Resources Among Multiple Users "; and provisional patent filed on August 11, 2004 Patent application number 60 / 600,960, titled "Method, Apparatus, and System for Wireless Communications"; all their patent applications have been assigned to the same assignee as this patent application and are expressly incorporated by reference In this article. [Technical Field to which the Invention belongs] The present invention relates broadly to the field of communications, and in particular, the present invention relates to a stack of wireless local area network (LAN) protocols. [Prior Art] Wireless communication systems are widely deployed to provide various types of communication such as voice and data. A typical wireless data system or network provides multiple users access to one or more shared resources. The system can use various multiple access technologies, such as Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM), Time Division Multiplexing (TDM), Code Division Multiplexing (CDM), and others. An example wireless network includes a cellular data system. The following are a few of these examples: (1) "TIA / EIA-95-B Mobile Station-Base for Dual-Mode Broadband Spread Spectrum Cellular System-TIA / EIA-95-B Mobile Station-Base Station Compatibility Standard for Dual-Mode Wideband Spread Spectrum Cellular System (IS-95 standard); (2) named "3rd Generation Partnership 96870.doc 200525375"

Project ; 3GPP)之聯盟所提出的標準,並且在一組文獻中具 體化,包括文號30丁325.21卜30丁325.212、30丁325.213 及3〇丁8 25.214(界-0〇旭八標準);(3)名為「第三代合夥專案 2」(3rd Generation Partnership Project 2 ; 3GPP2)之聯盟所 提出的標準,並且在「cdma2000展頻系統之TR-45.5實體層 標準」(TR-45.5 Physical Layer Standard for cdma2000 Spread Spectrum Systems ; IS-2000標準)文獻中具體化;以 及(4)符合TIA/EIA/IS-856標準(稱為IS-856標準)的高資料 傳輸率(HDR)通信系統。 其他無線系統實例包括無線區域網路(Wireless Local Area Network ; WLAN),例如,IEEE 802_ 11 標準(即, 802.11(a)、(b)或(g))。部署包括正交分頻多工(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing; OFDM)調變技術的一多 重輸入多重輸出(Multiple Input Multiple Output ; MIMO)WLAN,可達成改良這些網路。 隨著無線系統設計進步,較高資料傳輸率已成為可行。 較高資料傳輸率開啟進階應用的可能性,其中包括語音、 視訊、快速資料傳送及各種其他應用。但是,各種應用可 能具有不同的資料傳送需求。許多類型資料會具有延時及 輸送量需求,或需要某些服務品質(Quality of Service; QoS) 保證。在無資源管理情況下,系統容量可能會減少,並且 系統無法高效率運作。 通常會使用媒體存取控制(Medium Access Control; MAC) 協定來配置數個使用者之間共用的通信資源。MAC協定通 96870.doc 200525375 常會介接較高層至用於傳輸及接收資料的實體層。為了從 負料傳輸率增加而獲益’ M A C協定必須經過設計以高效率 使用共用的資源。 已開發的高效率系統支援多重傳輸率,傳輸率會依據實 體鏈路特性而範圍廣泛地改變。已知不同資料應用類型的 %求不同’並且至系統内不同使用者終端機之可支援的資 料傳輸率之變化極大,所以還必須開發佇列處理各種流量 類型,及在通常異類的各種實體鏈路上傳輸等方面的進 展。因此,用於高效率使用高輸送量系統的MAc處理的技 術係為需要的。 【發明内容】 本發明揭示之具體實施例滿足此項技術對於高效率使用 高輸送量系統的MAC處理之需求。在一項態樣中,一種設 備I括第一層,用於接收來自一或多個資料流之一或多 個封包,以及用於從該等一或多個封包來產生一或多個第 —層協定資料單元(Protocol Data Unit ; pDU)。在另一項態 樣中,一第二層被部署,用於接收來自該第一層之一或多 個第一層PDU,並且從該等一或多個第一層pDu來產生一 或多個第二層PDU。在另一項態樣中,一第三層被部署, 用=接收該等-或多個第二層PDU,並且傳輸該等一或多 :第二層PDU至一遠端站台。在另一項態樣中,一層管理 貝破部署,用於接收第二層反饋,並幻專遞該第二層反饋 至—第一層。一層管理員還可接收來自任何層之反饋,並 且傳遞該反饋至任何其他層。在__項態樣中,反饋包括實 96870.doc 200525375 體層反饋。 在另—項態樣_,部署一種協定堆集,其具有一 包括邏輯,該邏輯用於檢查來自-或多個封包曰的 頭以及響應該等檢查後之標頭而分類該等封包成 =:=料流。在另一項態樣中,1協定堆集可包 點播送映射已分類之封包的邏輯。該多點播送映 == 亍以響應實體層反饋。在另一項態樣中,一種協 用於分割及/或重組已分類之封包的邏輯。該 刀简重組可被執行以響應實體層反饋。在另一項態樣 邏輯。種協定堆集可包括用於實體層傳輪已分類之封包的 一在2項怨樣中’本發明揭示一種協定堆集,包括下 -士多T:-調節層、一資料鏈路控制層、一實體層及 層理貝。本發明揭示一種可調整以包括來自多個資料 之資料的MAC子層協定資料單元。下文會進一步詳述各 特徵及態樣。Project; 3GPP) standards, and are specified in a set of documents, including document numbers 30, 325.21, 30, 325.212, 30, 325.213, and 30, 8 25.214 (Boundary-0, Xu 8 standards); (3) The standard proposed by the consortium named "3rd Generation Partnership Project 2" (3GPP2), and the "TR-45.5 Physical Layer Standard for the CDMA2000 Spread Spectrum System" (TR-45.5 Physical Layer Standard for cdma2000 Spread Spectrum Systems; IS-2000 standard); and (4) a high data rate (HDR) communication system that complies with the TIA / EIA / IS-856 standard (referred to as the IS-856 standard). Other examples of wireless systems include Wireless Local Area Networks (WLANs), such as the IEEE 802-11 standard (ie, 802.11 (a), (b), or (g)). The deployment of a Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) WLAN including Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) modulation technology can improve these networks. With the advancement of wireless system design, higher data transmission rates have become feasible. Higher data rates open up the possibilities of advanced applications, including voice, video, fast data transfer, and various other applications. However, various applications may have different data transfer requirements. Many types of data may have latency and throughput requirements, or require some Quality of Service (QoS) guarantee. Without resource management, system capacity may decrease and the system may not operate efficiently. The Medium Access Control (MAC) protocol is usually used to configure communication resources shared between several users. The MAC protocol 96870.doc 200525375 often interfaces higher layers to the physical layer used to transmit and receive data. In order to benefit from the increase in negative material transmission rate, the 'MAC protocol must be designed to use shared resources efficiently. Developed high-efficiency systems support multiple transmission rates, which can vary widely depending on the physical link characteristics. It is known that the% of different data application types must be different, and the data transmission rate supported by different user terminals in the system varies greatly. Therefore, it is necessary to develop queues to handle various types of traffic, as well as in various heterogeneous physical chains Progress on the road. Therefore, a technology for MAc processing using a high-throughput system with high efficiency is required. [Summary of the Invention] The specific embodiments disclosed in the present invention satisfy the requirements of this technology for MAC processing using a high-throughput system with high efficiency. In one aspect, a device includes a first layer for receiving one or more packets from one or more data streams, and for generating one or more packets from the one or more packets. -Layer protocol data unit (Protocol Data Unit; pDU). In another aspect, a second layer is deployed to receive one or more first layer PDUs from the first layer and generate one or more from the one or more first layer pDus. Layer 2 PDUs. In another aspect, a third layer is deployed to receive the one or more second layer PDUs and transmit the one or more second layer PDUs to a remote station. In another aspect, a layer of management deployment is used to receive the second layer of feedback and send the second layer of feedback to the first layer. A layer administrator can also receive feedback from any layer and pass that feedback to any other layer. In the __ item aspect, the feedback includes real-world feedback. In another aspect, a protocol stack is deployed, which includes an include logic that is used to check the headers from-or multiple packets and to classify the packets into headers in response to such checks =: = Material flow. In another aspect, the 1-contract stack can include on-demand mapping logic that maps classified packets. The multicast presentation == 亍 in response to entity layer feedback. In another aspect, a logic that is used to split and / or reassemble classified packets. This restructuring can be performed in response to entity layer feedback. In another aspect logic. This type of protocol stack may include one of the two categories of packets used for physical layer transfer. 'The present invention discloses a protocol stack, including a lower-to-Stop T: -regulation layer, a data link control layer, a Solid layers and layers. The present invention discloses a MAC sublayer protocol data unit that can be adjusted to include data from multiple data. Each feature and aspect will be further detailed below.

在另工員悲樣中’實體層反饋係用於調節層處理。在_ :體實%例中’實體層反饋係用於分割。在另〆項具體 實%例中,實體層反饋係用於多點播送映射至一或多個單 』播u $在另—項具體實施例中,可選擇—用於執行 夕點播运傳輸的單點播送、多點播送或廣播頻道之組合, 以響應對應於各種頻道的實體層反饋。 在另一項態樣中,一用於從一第一站台傳輸至一第二站 CT的貝料單TL包括·零或多個完整之子資料單元、來自前 96870.doc -10- 200525375 一傳輸的零或一個局部子資料單元以及用於填滿該資料單 元的零或一個局部子資料單元。在一項具體實施例中,一 指標係用於指示任何完整之子資料單元的位置。一局部子 貧料單兀可被插入在一預先決定位置。局部子資料單元可 與先㈤健存之局部子資料單元組合在一起,或予以儲存以 供以後使用。在一項具體實施例中,一子資料單元可能是 一 MUX子層協定資料單元(mux PDU)。 也已提出各種其他態樣及具體實施例。彼等態樣具有提 供高效率媒體存取控制之優勢,並且適用於配合包含高資 料傳輸率以及低資料傳輸率之實體層。 【實施方式】 本發明揭示一種子網路協定堆集,其支援配合無線lan (或使用最新問市傳輸技術的相似應用)極高位元速率之實 體層的同效率、低延時且高輸送量運作。示範性wlan支 援20 MHz頻寬超過丨〇〇 Mbps(mim〇n bits per ;每秒 百萬位元)位元速率。 配合該協定堆集說明一種用於多工處理來自多個使用者 資料流之協定資料單元(PDU)與子網路控制實體(MAC PDU)成為m組資料流之方法。配合該協定堆集說明 一種用於多工處理來自多個使用者資料流之協定資料單元 (pdu)與子網路控制實體(MAC PDU)成為單—位元組資料 流之方法。這項做法可支援高效能無線lan子網路^於 配合極高位元速率之實體層的高效率、低延時且高輸送量 運作。 96870.doc -11 - 200525375 子網路協定堆集廣泛支援高資料傳輸率、高頻寬實體層 傳送機制,包括(但不限於)··以OFDM調變為基礎的傳送機 制;單載波調變技術;適用於極高頻寬效率運作之使用多 個接收天線及多個發射天線的系統(多重輸入多重輸出In the case of another worker, the physical layer feedback is used for the adjustment layer processing. In the case of _: Reality%, the entity layer feedback is used for segmentation. In another specific example, the physical layer feedback is used for multicast mapping to one or more unicast broadcasts. In another specific embodiment, it is optional—used for performing on-demand transport transmission. A combination of unicast, multicast, or broadcast channels in response to physical layer feedback corresponding to various channels. In another aspect, a shell material list TL for transmission from a first station to a second station CT includes zero or more complete child data units, from the former 96870.doc -10- 200525375 a transmission Zero or one local child data unit and zero or one local child data unit to fill the data unit. In a specific embodiment, an indicator is used to indicate the location of any complete child data unit. A partial lean unit can be inserted in a predetermined position. The local subdata unit can be combined with the local subdata unit that was saved first, or stored for later use. In a specific embodiment, a sub-data unit may be a MUX sub-layer protocol data unit (mux PDU). Various other aspects and specific embodiments have also been proposed. These aspects have the advantage of providing high-efficiency media access control, and are suitable for cooperating with the physical layer including high data transmission rate and low data transmission rate. [Embodiment] The present invention discloses a sub-network protocol stack, which supports the same efficiency, low latency, and high throughput operation of the physical layer with the extremely high bit rate of wireless LAN (or similar applications using the latest market-oriented transmission technology). The exemplary wlan supports a 20 MHz bandwidth in excess of 丨 00 Mbps (mimón bits per; million bits per second) bit rate. A method for multiplexing the protocol data unit (PDU) and the subnet control entity (MAC PDU) from multiple user data streams into m groups of data streams is described in conjunction with the protocol stack. Description with the protocol stack A method for multiplexing protocol data units (PDUs) and subnet control entities (MAC PDUs) from multiple user data streams into a single-byte data stream. This approach can support high-performance wireless LAN subnets operating at high efficiency, low latency, and high throughput with the physical layer of very high bit rates. 96870.doc -11-200525375 Subnet protocol stacks widely support high data transmission rates and high-bandwidth physical layer transmission mechanisms, including (but not limited to) · Transmission mechanisms based on OFDM modulation; single-carrier modulation technology; applicable System using multiple receive antennas and multiple transmit antennas operating at very high bandwidth efficiency (multiple input multiple output

(Multiple Input Multiple Output ; ΜΙΜΟ)系統(ΜΙΜΟ),包 括多重輸入單一輸出(Multiple Input Single Output ; MISO) 系統),配合空間多工技術之使用多個接收天線及多個發射 天線的系統,用於在相同在此情況下期間傳輸資料至使用 者終%機,或接收來自使用者終端機的資料,·以及使用分 碼多向近接(code division multiple access; CDMA)技術之 系統,用於允許多個使用者同時傳輸。(Multiple Input Multiple Output; ΜΙΜΟ) system (ΜΙΜΟ), including a Multiple Input Single Output (MISO) system), a system using multiple receive antennas and multiple transmit antennas in conjunction with space multiplexing technology, for In the same case, data is transmitted to or received from the user terminal, and a system using code division multiple access (CDMA) technology is used to allow multiple Users transmit simultaneously.

本文中說明的一個或一個以上示範性具體實施例係在^ 線資料通訊系統背景下提出。雖然在此背景下使用本發a 有許多優點,但是在不同的環境或組態中也可併入本發弓 的不同具體實施例。-般而言,本文中說明的各種系統± 可使用軟體控制型處理器、積體電路或離散邏輯構成。^ 份說明書所提及的資料、指令、命令、資訊、信號、符受 及晶片有利於以電壓、電流、電磁波、磁場或粒子、光与 或粒子、或其任何組合來表示。此外,每個方塊圖中所六 的方塊均可能代理硬體或方法步驟。方法㈣可互換,^ 不會脫離本發明的料。本文中使料術語「示範」㈣ 示「當作實例、例子或解說」。本文中當作「示範」說明# 施例不一定被視為較佳具體實施例或優於❹ 96870.doc -12- 200525375 圖1繪示系統100的示範性具體實施例,該系統包括連接 至一或多個使用者終端機(UT)106A-N的存取點(ΑΡ)104。 ΑΡ與UT經由無線區域網路區域(WLAN)12〇通信。在此示範 性具體實施例中,WLAN 120是一種高速ΜΙΜΟ OFDM系 統。然而’ WLAN 120可能是任何無線LAN。存取點104經 由網路102與任何外部裝置或處理序(pr〇cess)通信。網路 102可能是網際網路、内部網路或任何其他有線、無線或光 學網路。連接110將來自網路的實體層訊號載送至存取點 104。裝置或處理序可連接至網路1〇2,或當作WLAN ι2〇 上的UT(或經由連接與其相連)。可連接至網路網路1 或 WLAN 120之實例包括電話、個人數位助理(pDA)、各種類 似黾腦(膝上型電腦、個人電腦、工作站、任何類型終端機)、 視sfi裝置(例如,攝影機、攝錄像機、web攝影機以及幾乎 任何類型資料裝置)。處理序(pr〇cess)可包括語音、視訊、 資料通信等等。各種資料流具有不同的傳輸需求,這可以 藉由用多樣化的服務品質(Quality 〇f Service ; QoS)技術來 適應各需求。 使用集中式ΑΡ 104來部署系統1 〇〇。在此示範性具體實施 例中’所有UT 106都與該AP通信。在一項替代具體實施例 中’修改系統,就可以提供介於UT之間的直接對等式 (peer-to-peer)通信,如熟悉此項技術者所知。基於清楚論 述’在此示範性具體實施例中,由AP來控制實體層傳輸機 制之存取。 在一項具體實施例中,AP 104提供乙太網路調節,圖24 96870.doc -13- 200525375 繪示其實例。在此情況下,可使用AP 1 04來部署IP路由器 2410,藉此提供連至網路網路102的連接(經由乙太網路連 接110)。例如,圖中所示之例證性實例UT 106是行動電話 106A、個人數位助理(PDA)106B、膝上型電腦i〇6C、工作 站106D、個人電腦106E、視訊攝影機l〇6F及視訊投影機 106G。可透過WLAN子網路120在路由器與UT 106之間傳輸 乙太網路訊框(如下文詳細說明所述)。 乙太網路調節及連接能力是此項技術中已知的技術。圖 26繪示(例如)分別用於UT 106和AP 104的乙太網路調節協 定堆集2640和2650,如下文整合各實例層之詳細說明所 述。UT協定堆集2640包括較上層2610、IP層2615、乙太網 路MAC層2620A、調節層310A、資料鏈路層320A及實體層 (PHY)240A。AP協定堆集2650包括PHY 240B(經由RF鏈路 120連接至UT PHY 240A)、資料鏈路層320B及調節層 310B。乙太網路MAC 2620B將調節層310B連接至乙太網路 PHY 2625’乙太網路PHY 2625連接至11〇有線網路1〇2。 在一項替代具體實施例中,AP 104提供ip調節,圖25繪 示其實例。在此情況下,AP 104係當做該組連接之使用者 的閘道路由器(如參考圖24之說明所述)。在此情況下,ap 104可在UT 106之間往返投送IP資料元(Ip datagram)。 IP調節及連接能力是此項技術中已知的技術。圖27繪示 (例如)分別用於UT 106和AP 104的ip協定堆集2740和 2750 ’如下文整合各實例層之詳細說明所述。υτ協定堆集 2740包括較上層2710、IP層2720A、調節層31〇a、資料鏈 96870.doc -14- 200525375 路層320A及實體層(ΡΗΥ)240Α。AP協定堆集2750包括PHY 240B(經由RF鏈路120連接至UT PHY 240A)、資料鏈路層 320B及調節層310B。IP層2720B將調節層310B連接至乙太 網路MAC 2725,而乙太網路MAC 2725連接至乙太網路PHY 2730。乙太網路PHY 2730連接至110有線網路102。 圖2繪示無線通信裝置的示範性具體實施例,該無線通信 裝置可被組態成一存取點104或使用者終端機106。圖2繪示 存取點104組態。收發器210依據網路102的實體層需求在連 鲁 接110上進行接收及傳輸。接收自或傳至連接至網路102之 裝置或應用程式的資料被傳遞至MAC處理器220。本文中將 這些資料稱為資料流260。資料流可具有不同的特性,並且 會依據該資料流所相關聯的應用程式類型而需要不同的處 理方式。例如,視訊或語音的特徵為低延時資料流(一般而 言,視訊的輸送量需求高於語音的輸送量需求)。許多資料 應用程式較不受延時影響,但是可能具有較高的資料完整 性需求(即,語音可能容許某封包損失,檔案傳送通常不容 翁 許封包損失)。 MAC處理器220接收並處理資料流260,以便在實體層上 傳輸資料流。MAC處理器220接收並處理資料流260,以便 在實體層上傳輸資料流。AP與UT之間也會傳送内部控制及 發訊號。在連接270上將MAC協定資料單元(MAC Protocol Data Unit ; MAC PDU)傳遞至無線LAN收發器240及接收來 自無線LAN收發器240的MAC PDU。下文說明從資料流和 命令轉換至-MAC PDU,反之亦然。下文進一步說明基於各 96870.doc -15- 200525375 種目的,將相對應於各種MAC ID的反饋280從實體層 (PHY)240傳回至MAC處理器220。反饋280可包含任何實體 層資訊,包括可支援的頻道傳輸率(包括多點播送頻道及單 點播送頻道)、調變格式及各種其他參數。 在一項示範性具體實施例中,調節層(ADAP)及資料鏈路 控制層(DLC)係在MAC處理器220中執行。實體層(PHY)係 在無線LAN收發器240上執行。熟悉此項技術者應知道,可 使用任何各種組態來進行各項功能分割。MAC處理器220 可執行有關實體層的部分或所有處理。一無線LAN收發器 可包括一用於執行MAC處理或其子部分的處理器。可部署 任何數量之處理器、特殊用途硬體或其組合。 MAC處理器220可能是一般用途微處理器、數位信號處理 器(DSP)或特殊用途處理器。MAC處理器220可連接用於辅 助各種工作的特殊用途硬體(圖中未詳細繪示)。可在外接處 理器(例如,外接的電腦或透過網路連線)上執行各種應用程 式,或可在存取點104内的額外處理器(圖中未繪示)上執行 各種應用程式,或可在MAC處理器220本身上執行各種應用 程式。圖中所示之MAC處理器220係連接記憶體255,記憶 體255可用於儲存得以執行本文所說明之各項程序和方法 的資料以及指令。熟悉此項技術者應知道,記憶體255可能 係由一或多個各類型記憶體組件所組成,並且可整個或局 部具體化在MAC處理器220内。 除了儲存得以執行本文所說明之功能的指令及資料外, 記憶體255還可用於儲存相關聯於各種佇列的資料(如下文 96870.doc -16- 200525375 詳細說明所述)。記憶體255可包括UT代理伺服器(proxy)佇 列(如下文所述)。 無線LAN收發器240可能是任何類型收發器。在一項示範 性具體實施例中,無線LAN收發器240是可配合ΜΙΜΟ或 MISO介面運作的OFDM收發器。OFDM、ΜΙΜΟ及MISO為此 項技術者已知的技術。2003年8月27日提出的共同申請美國 專利申請案號1〇/650,295標題為「FREQUENCY-INDEPENDENT SPATIAL-PROCIESSING FOR WIDEBAND MISO AND ΜΙΜΟ SYSTEMS」中詳述各種OFDM、ΜΙΜΟ及MISO收發器,該 案已讓渡給本發明受讓人。 圖中所示之無線LAN收發器240係連接天線250 A-N。在 各項具體實施例中可以支援任何數量的天線。天線250係用 來在WLAN 120上傳輸和接收。 無線LAN收發器240可包括一連接至每個天線天線250的 空間處理器。該空間處理器可處理每個天線所要獨立傳輸 的資料。獨立處理的實例包括係基於頻道評估、來自UT的 反饋、頻道反轉或此項技術已知的各種其他技術。使用各 種已知的空間處理技術來執行此項處理。此類型的各種收 發器可使用波束成形(beam forming)、波束操控(beam steering)、特徵操控(eigen-steering)或用於增加一既定使用 者終端機之收發輸送量的其他空間技術。在一項傳輸OFDM 符號的具體實施例中,空間處理器可包括用於處理每個 OFDM子頻道(subchannel)或頻率格(bin)的多個子空間處理 器0 96870.doc 17 200525375 在一項示範性系統中,AP可具有N個天線,並且示範性 υτ可具有Μ個天線。因此,介於AP之天線與UT之天線之間 有Μ X Ν個路徑。使用這些多路徑來改良輸送量的各種空間 技術為此項技術已知的技術。在空間時間傳輸分集(Space Time Transmit Diversity; STTD)系統(本文中也稱為r分集」) 中傳輸之負料被格式化、編碼並且當做^—單,—資料流用 所有的天線予以傳送。運用Μ個發射天線與N個接收天線, 可能可形成ΜΙΝ(Μ,Ν)個獨立頻道。空間多工處理利用這些 獨立路徑,並且可在每個獨立路徑上傳輸不同資料。 用於獲知或調節ΑΡ與UT之間頻道特性的各種技術已為 吾人所知。可從每個傳輸天線傳輸獨特前導。可在每個接 收天線上接收及量測該等前導。接著,可將頻道反饋傳回 至傳輸方裝置,以便在傳輸時使用。頻道反轉是一種允許 預處理及傳輸之技術,但是屬於計算密集型技術。可執行 特徵分解(eigen decomposition),並且可採用查詢表來決定 傳輸率。為了避免頻道分解,一項替代技術會使用前導的 特徵導入來簡化空間處理。預失真(pre-(jistortion)技術是用 於簡化接收器處理的已知技術。 因此,依據目前的頻道狀況,整個系統可提供用於傳輸 至各種使用者終端機之不同的資料傳輸率。具體而言,介 於AP與每個UT間之特定鏈路的效能可能高於一個以上υτ 可共用之鏈路的效能。下文進一步詳述實例。無線LAN收 發器240可依據對於AP與UT間之實體鏈路所使用的空間處 理來決定可支援的傳輸率。可在連接2 8 0上反饋此項資訊, 96870.doc -18- 200525375 以便在MAC處理中使用,如下文詳細說明所述。 可依據UT的資料需要來部署數個天線。例如,高清晰度 視訊顯示器基於高頻寬需求而可包括(例如)四個天線,而 PDA可能使用兩個天線就可滿足。一示範性存取點可具有 四個天線。 可按相似於圖2所示之存取點1〇4的方式來部署使用者終 端機106。若是資料流260未連接LAN收發器(雖然UT可包括 有線或無線收發器),則資料流260通常係接收自或傳遞至 UT或連接UT之裝置上運作的一或多個應用程式或處理 序。連接至AP 104或UT 106的較高層級可能是任何類型。 本文所描述的各項僅為例證。 協定堆集 圖3繪示示範性子網路協定堆集3〇〇。子網路協定堆集3〇〇 可當做介於極高位元速率LAN實體層與網路層或其他網路 的MAC層(例如,乙太網路MAc層或TCP/IP網路層)之間的 介面。可部署各種特徵的協定堆集3〇〇,藉此充分利用極高 效率無線LAN實體層。示範性協定堆集可被設計成提供各 項優勢,實例包括··(a)最小化協定所耗用的輸送量負荷量; (b)最大化封裝子網路資料單元成為實體層訊框的效率;(c) 最小化延時對易受延遲影響之傳輸機制(例如,TCp)所造成 的端對端來回傳輸延遲;(d)提供高可靠、按順序傳遞子網 路貧料單元;(e)提供支援現有網路層及應用,以及提供適 應未來網路和應用程式的充分彈性;以及⑴無障礙地整合 現有網路技術。 96870.doc -19- 200525375 協定堆集300具有數個薄子層、數個操作模式以及用於支 援多個外部網路之介面的設施。圖3繪示調節層3丨〇、資料 鏈路控制層320及實體層240。層管理員38〇互連於每個子 層’用於提供各種功能之通信及控制,如下文所述。 圖3繪示示範性協定堆集300組態。虛線標示可在mac處 理器220中部署之組件的示範性組態,如上文所述。包括調 節層310、資料鏈路控制層320及層管理員38〇。如上文所 述,在此組態中,實體層240在連接27〇上接收及傳輸MAC 協疋資料單元(PDU)。反饋連接280被導引至層管理員“ο, 以便提供用於在下文所述之各項功能中使用的實體層資 訊。此項實例僅僅是例證性。熟悉此項技術者應明白,在 本發明範疇内,可部署任何數量組件,且被組態成包括所 說明之堆集功能的任何組合。 調節層310提供介接至較高層的介面。例如,調節層可介 接IP堆集(用於IP調節)、乙太網路mac(用於乙太網路調節) 或各種其他網路層。資料流260可接收自用於MAC處理的一 或多個較高層,並且在實體層240上傳輸。資料流26〇也可 經由貫體層予以接收、處理及重新組合,以便傳遞至一或 多個較高層。 調節層3 10包括下列功能:分割和重組3 12、資料流分類 3 14及多點播送映射3 16。資料流分類功能3丨4檢查接收自較 南層的標頭封包(來自資料流260)、映射每個封包至一使用 者終端機或一多點播送群組MAC識別項(MAC ID)以及基 於服務品質(QoS)差別待遇來分類封包。多點播送映射功能 96870.doc -20- 200525375 316決定是否使用多點播送MAC ID(稱為「MAC層多點播 送」)來傳輸多點播送使用者資料,或透過多個單點播送 MAC ID(稱為「調節層多點播送」)來傳輸多點播送使用者 資料,下文會詳細說明實例。分割和重組(SAR)功能3 12調 節每個較高層封包成為適用於邏輯鏈路(Logical Link ; LL) 模式的協定資料單元(PDU)大小。針對每個MAC ID來個別 執行SAR功能312。資料流分類功能314是共通的功能。 資料鏈路控制層320包括邏輯鏈路(LL)層330、無線電鏈 路控制(Radio Link Control ; RLC)層340、系統組態控制 3 50、MUX功能360及共通MAC功能370。圖3中繪示彼等層 中每一層的子組塊,並且將於下文詳細說明。圖中所示之 組塊僅為例證。在各項替代具體實施例中可部署彼等功能 之子集以及額外功能。 實體層240可能是任何類型實體層,如上文說明之實例所 述。一項示範性具體實施例使用ΜΙΜΟ OFDM實體層。下文 說明内容中包含此項具體實施例的示範性參數。 層管理員380(LM)介接調節層310、資料鏈路控制層320 及實體層240,用以管理QoS、許可控制以及實體層發射器 和接收器參數控制。請注意,在執行本文中所說明之各項 功能過程中,可使用來自實體層的反饋280。例如,在多點 播送映射316或分割和重組312中可使用適用於各種UT的 可支援傳輸率。 調節層 資料流分類(FLCL)功能3 14檢查傳入之封包的封包標頭 96870.doc -21 - 200525375 欄位,並且其對映成資料流。在執行ip調節的示範性具體 實施例中,資料流分類可運用下列欄位:(a)IP來源位址和 目的地位址;(b)IP來源埠和目的地埠;(c)IP DiffServ Code Point(DSCP ; IP DiffServ字碼指標);(d)資源保留協定 (Resource Reservation Protocol ; RSVP)訊息;以及(e)即時 傳輸控制協定(Real-time Transport Control Protocol ; RTCP) 訊息及即時傳輸協定(Real-time Transport Protocol ; RTP) 標頭。在執行乙太網路調節的示範性具體實施例中,資料 流分類可使用802· lp及802.1 q標頭欄位。乙太網路調節也可 以使用IP資料流分類,然而這會發生層違規。熟悉此項技 術者應明白,可部署各種其他類型資料流分類作為替代方 案。 FLCL 314決定一識別之資料流260是否映射至現有的 MAC ID、邏輯鏈路(Logical Link ; LL)模式及資料流ID(如 下文詳細說明所述)。如果傳入之封包映射至現有資料流, 則FLCL會將要進一步處理的封包轉遞至分割和重組(SAR) 功能3 12。如果要求新的MAC ID,則會將一要求轉遞至無 線電鏈路控制(RLC)340中的關聯控制功能344。 如果識別到一現有MAC ID的新資料流,則層管理員380 中的QoS管理員功能382會決定該資料流所需的邏輯鏈路模 式類型。如果初始化新的LL模式,則會將該要求轉遞至相 對應於該MAC ID的LLC功能338,以便處理模式協商。如 果在現有的LL模式内建置新的資料流,則會將該要求轉遞 至LLC功能3 38。2003年11月26曰提出的共同申請美國專利 96870.doc -22- 200525375 申請案第 1〇/723,346 號標題為「QUALITY OF SERVICE SCHEDULER FOR A WIRELESS NETWORK」中詳述維護 QoS佇列之具體實施例,該專利案已讓渡給本發明受讓人。 在IP或乙太網路多點播送之實例中,多點播送映射功能 316決定是否要藉由映射至一多點播送MAC ID以便使用 MAC層多點播送來處理該封包,或是否將該封包處理成為 多個單點播送傳輸(本文中稱為「調節層多點播送」 (Adaptation Layer Multicast)。如果要將該封包處理成為多 個單點播送傳輸,則多點播送映射功能3 16會複製該封包的 多個複本(各複本係用於要傳輸封包至該處的每個單點播 送MAC ID),並且轉遞該等封包至分割和重組(SAR)功能 3 12。下文中將參考圖15至圖16來詳細說明此態樣。 如前段落說明所述,資料流分類功能3 14映射一封包至一 MAC ID、LL模式及資料流ID(若有的話)。分割和重組功能 3 12將較高層封包(即,IP資料元或乙太網路訊框)分割成適 用於透過邏輯鏈路模式傳輸的多個片段(segment)。下文中 將參考圖17至圖1 8來詳細說明此態樣之示範性具體實施 例。在此實例中,會加入每片段一個一位元組調節層標頭, 用於允許當將該等片段依序傳遞至接收器中相對應之SAR 功能時予以重組。接著,調節層協定資料單元(PDU)被傳遞 至資料鏈路控制層320,以便配合分類參數予以處理:MAC ID、LL模式及資料流ID。 資料鏈路控制層 圖4繪示通過各層行進之使用者資料封包410(即,IP資料 96870.doc -23- 200525375 元、乙太網路訊框或其他封包)。在此例證說明中將描述示 範性之欄位大小及類型。熟悉此項技術者應明白,各種其 他大小、類型及組態皆被視為屬於本發明範疇内。 如圖所示,在調節層310分割該資料封包410成為片段。 每個調節子層PDU 430各載送彼等片段420之一。在此實例 中,資料封包410被分割成N個片段420A-N。一調節子層 PDU 430包括一含有對應片段420的封包承載 (payload)434。一類型欄位432(在此實例中為一個位元組) 被附加至該調節子層PDU 430。 在邏輯鏈路(LL)層330,一 LL標頭442(在此實例中為4個 位元組)被附加至含該調節子層PDU 430的該封包承載 434。該LL標頭442的示範性資訊包括一資料流識別項、控 制資訊及序號。運用標頭442及封包承載444來計算出並且 附加一 CRC 446,藉此構成一邏輯鏈路子層PDU(LL PDU)440。以類似方式,邏輯鏈路控制(LLC)338及無線電 鏈路控制(RLC)340(下文會詳細說明)構成LLC PDU及RLC PDU。LL PDU 440及LLC PDU和RLC PDU都被置入佇列 (即,高QoS佇列362、最佳工作(best effort)佇列364或控制 訊息佇列366)中,以由MUX功能360予以服務。 MUX功能360將一 MUX標頭452附力口至每個LL PDU 440。一示範性MUX標頭452可包含一長度及一類型(在此實 例中,標頭452為2個位元組)。可針對每個控制PDU(即,LLC PDU及RLC PDU)來構成一類似的標頭。LL PDU 440(或者, LLC或RLC PDU)構成封包承載454。標頭452及封包承載454 96870.doc -24- 200525375 構成MUX子層PDU(MPDU)450(本文中也將MUX子層PDU 稱為 MUX PDU)。 MAC協定將共用媒體上的通信資源配置在一連串MAC 訊框中。MAC排程器376決定為每個MAC訊框(標示為MAC 訊框f,其中f指示一定特殊MAC訊框)中一或多個MAC ID 所配置之實體層叢發大小。請注意,並非所有含要傳輸之 資料的MAC ID都會被配置在任何特定MAC訊框的空間 中。可部署任何存取控制或排程機制,皆屬於本發明範圍 内。當為一MAC ID進行配置作業時,該MAC ID所對應的 MUX功能360將構成一 MAC PDU 460,其包含要包括在該 MAC訊框f中的一或多個MUX PDU 450。一或多個所配置之 MAC ID的一或多個MAC PDU 460被包括在一 MAC訊框中 (即,下文中參考圖5所詳述的MAC訊框500)。 在一項示範性具體實施例中,一項態樣允許傳輸一局部 MPDU 450,藉此允許高效率地封裝在一 MAC PDU 460中。 下文會詳細解說此態樣。在此實例中,MUX功能360維護前 一次傳輸(藉由局部MPDU 464來識別)所留下之任何局部 MPDU 450的未傳輸位元組計數。會在目前訊框的任何新 PDU 466(即,LL PDU或控制PDU)之前先傳輸彼等位元組 464。標頭462(在此實例中為2個位元組)包括一 MUX指標, 用於指向目前訊框中所要傳輸之第一個新MPDU(在此實例 中為MPDU 466A)的起始處。標頭462還可包括一 MAC位址。 MAC PDU 460包括該MUX指標462、一位於起始處之可 能的局部MUX PDU 464(前一次配置所留下)、接著是零或 96870.doc •25 - 200525375 多個完整MUX PDU 466A-N以及一可能的局部MUX PDU 468(來自目前的配置)或用於填滿該實體層叢發之已配置部 分的其他填補項(padding)。會在已配置給MAC ID的實體層 叢發中運送MAC PDU 460。 共同MAC、MAC訊框及傳輸頻道 圖5繪示示範性MAC訊框500。共同MAC功能370管理下 列傳輸頻道片段之間的MAC訊框500配置··廣播、控制、正 向和反向流量(分別稱為下載鏈路階段及上載鏈路階段)以 及隨機存取。MAC組訊框功能372可使用各種構成組件來構 成訊框,下文會詳細說明。下文會詳細說明示範性功能、 編碼及傳輸頻道持續時間。 在此示範性具體實施例中,會在一 2 ms(毫秒)時間間隔時 段内來分時雙工處理(TDD) — MAC訊框。MAC訊框5〇〇被分 成五個傳輸頻道(按圖中所示之5 10-550順序出現)。在替代 具體實施例中可部署替代順序及不同的訊框大小。有關 MAC訊框500配置的持續時間可被量子化成某小段共同時 間間隔。在一項示範性具體實施例中,會以800 ns(奈秒, 這也是短型或長型OFDM符號的循環前置碼(cyclic prefix) 持續時間,下文會詳細說明)為單元來量子化有關MAC訊框 500配置的持續時間。短型OFDM符號為4.0 (微秒)或5倍 的 800 ns 〇 示範性MAC在一 MAC訊框内提供五個傳輸頻道··(a)廣播 頻道(Broadcast Channel ; BCH)510,用於載送廣播控制頻 道(Broadcast Control Channel; BCCH); (b)控制頻道(Control 96870.doc •26- 200525375One or more exemplary embodiments described herein are proposed in the context of a wireless data communication system. Although there are many advantages to using the present a in this context, different specific embodiments of the present bow can also be incorporated in different environments or configurations. -In general, the various systems described in this article can be constructed using software-controlled processors, integrated circuits, or discrete logic. ^ The materials, instructions, commands, information, signals, symbols, and chips mentioned in this manual are beneficial to be represented by voltage, current, electromagnetic waves, magnetic fields or particles, light and or particles, or any combination thereof. In addition, the six blocks in each block diagram may represent hardware or method steps. Method ㈣ is interchangeable, and will not depart from the materials of the present invention. The term "demonstration" in this article means "to be taken as an example, instance, or explanation." As used herein, as an "exemplary" description # Embodiments are not necessarily considered to be better or better than 96870.doc -12- 200525375 FIG. 1 illustrates an exemplary embodiment of a system 100 that includes a connection to One or more user terminal (UT) 106A-N access points (AP) 104. The AP and the UT communicate via a wireless local area network (WLAN) 120. In this exemplary embodiment, WLAN 120 is a high-speed MIMO OFDM system. However, WLAN 120 may be any wireless LAN. The access point 104 communicates with any external device or process via the network 102. Network 102 may be the Internet, an intranet, or any other wired, wireless, or optical network. The connection 110 carries the physical layer signal from the network to the access point 104. The device or process can be connected to the network 102 or as a UT (or connected to it via a connection) on the WLAN ι20. Examples of networks that can be connected to network 1 or WLAN 120 include telephones, personal digital assistants (pDA), various similar computers (laptops, personal computers, workstations, any type of terminal), video sfi devices (eg, Cameras, camcorders, web cameras, and almost any type of data device). The processing sequence may include voice, video, data communication, and so on. Various data streams have different transmission requirements, which can be adapted to various needs by using a variety of Quality of Service (QoS) technologies. System 100 was deployed using centralized AP 104. In this exemplary embodiment, 'all UTs 106 communicate with the AP. In an alternative embodiment, the system is modified to provide peer-to-peer communication between UTs, as known to those skilled in the art. Based on the clear statement, in this exemplary embodiment, the access of the physical layer transmission mechanism is controlled by the AP. In a specific embodiment, the AP 104 provides Ethernet adjustment. An example is shown in FIG. 24 96870.doc -13- 200525375. In this case, AP 10 04 can be used to deploy the IP router 2410 to provide a connection to network 102 (via Ethernet connection 110). For example, the illustrative example UT 106 shown in the figure is a mobile phone 106A, a personal digital assistant (PDA) 106B, a laptop 106C, a workstation 106D, a personal computer 106E, a video camera 106F, and a video projector 106G . Ethernet frames can be transmitted between the router and the UT 106 via the WLAN subnet 120 (as described in more detail below). Ethernet regulation and connection capabilities are known in the art. Figure 26 shows, for example, the Ethernet Tuning Protocol Stacks 2640 and 2650 for UT 106 and AP 104, respectively, as described in the detailed description of integrating each instance layer below. The UT protocol stack 2640 includes an upper layer 2610, an IP layer 2615, an Ethernet MAC layer 2620A, an adjustment layer 310A, a data link layer 320A, and a physical layer (PHY) 240A. The AP protocol stack 2650 includes a PHY 240B (connected to the UT PHY 240A via the RF link 120), a data link layer 320B, and a regulation layer 310B. The Ethernet MAC 2620B connects the regulation layer 310B to the Ethernet PHY 2625 'and the Ethernet PHY 2625 connects to the 110 wired network 102. In an alternative embodiment, the AP 104 provides ip adjustments, and Figure 25 shows an example thereof. In this case, AP 104 acts as a gateway router for the users of this group of connections (as described with reference to Figure 24). In this case, the ap 104 can deliver IP datagrams to and from the UT 106. IP adjustment and connection capabilities are known in the art. Figure 27 shows, for example, the IP protocol stacks 2740 and 2750 'for UT 106 and AP 104, respectively, as described in the detailed description of integrating each instance layer below. The υτ protocol stack 2740 includes an upper layer 2710, an IP layer 2720A, an adjustment layer 31〇a, a data chain 96870.doc -14- 200525375, a road layer 320A, and a physical layer (P) 240A. The AP protocol stack 2750 includes a PHY 240B (connected to the UT PHY 240A via the RF link 120), a data link layer 320B, and a regulation layer 310B. The IP layer 2720B connects the conditioning layer 310B to the Ethernet MAC 2725, and the Ethernet MAC 2725 connects to the Ethernet PHY 2730. The Ethernet PHY 2730 is connected to 110 wired network 102. FIG. 2 illustrates an exemplary embodiment of a wireless communication device. The wireless communication device may be configured as an access point 104 or a user terminal 106. Figure 2 illustrates the configuration of the access point 104. The transceiver 210 receives and transmits on the connection 110 according to the physical layer requirements of the network 102. Data received from or transmitted to a device or application connected to the network 102 is passed to the MAC processor 220. This material is referred to herein as the data stream 260. Data streams can have different characteristics and require different processing methods depending on the type of application to which the data stream is associated. For example, video or voice is characterized by a low-latency data stream (generally, video needs more traffic than voice needs). Many data applications are less affected by latency, but may have higher data integrity requirements (ie, voice may tolerate a packet loss, and file transfers generally do not tolerate packet loss). The MAC processor 220 receives and processes the data stream 260 to transmit the data stream on the physical layer. The MAC processor 220 receives and processes the data stream 260 to transmit the data stream on the physical layer. Internal control and signaling are also transmitted between the AP and the UT. The MAC Protocol Data Unit (MAC PDU) is transmitted to the wireless LAN transceiver 240 and receives the MAC PDU from the wireless LAN transceiver 240 on the connection 270. The following explains the conversion from data streams and commands to -MAC PDUs and vice versa. The following further explains that the feedback 280 corresponding to various MAC IDs is transmitted from the physical layer (PHY) 240 to the MAC processor 220 based on each of the 96870.doc -15- 200525375 purposes. The feedback 280 may include any physical layer information, including supported channel transmission rates (including multicast and unicast channels), modulation formats, and various other parameters. In an exemplary embodiment, the adjustment layer (ADAP) and the data link control layer (DLC) are executed in the MAC processor 220. The physical layer (PHY) is implemented on the wireless LAN transceiver 240. Those skilled in the art should know that any of the various configurations can be used to divide the functions. The MAC processor 220 may perform some or all of the processing on the physical layer. A wireless LAN transceiver may include a processor for performing MAC processing or a sub-portion thereof. Any number of processors, special-purpose hardware, or a combination can be deployed. The MAC processor 220 may be a general-purpose microprocessor, a digital signal processor (DSP), or a special-purpose processor. The MAC processor 220 may be connected with special-purpose hardware (not shown in detail in the figure) for supporting various tasks. Various applications can be executed on an external processor (for example, an external computer or through a network connection), or various applications can be executed on an additional processor (not shown) in the access point 104, or Various applications can be executed on the MAC processor 220 itself. The MAC processor 220 shown in the figure is connected to a memory 255. The memory 255 can be used to store data and instructions that can execute the various procedures and methods described herein. Those skilled in the art should know that the memory 255 may be composed of one or more types of memory components, and may be embodied in the MAC processor 220 in whole or in part. In addition to storing instructions and data capable of performing the functions described herein, memory 255 can also be used to store data associated with various queues (as described in detail in 96870.doc -16- 200525375 below). The memory 255 may include a UT proxy queue (as described below). The wireless LAN transceiver 240 may be any type of transceiver. In an exemplary embodiment, the wireless LAN transceiver 240 is an OFDM transceiver that can operate with a MIMO or MISO interface. OFDM, MIMO and MISO are techniques known to those skilled in the art. The joint application U.S. Patent Application No. 10 / 650,295 filed on August 27, 2003, entitled "FREQUENCY-INDEPENDENT SPATIAL-PROCIESSING FOR WIDEBAND MISO AND ΜΜΟ SYSTEMS" details various OFDM, MIMO and MISO transceivers. Assigned to the assignee of the present invention. The wireless LAN transceiver 240 shown in the figure is connected to the antenna 250 A-N. Any number of antennas can be supported in various embodiments. The antenna 250 is used for transmission and reception on the WLAN 120. The wireless LAN transceiver 240 may include a space processor connected to each antenna antenna 250. The space processor can process the data to be transmitted independently by each antenna. Examples of independent processing include channel-based evaluation, feedback from the UT, channel reversal, or various other techniques known in the art. This processing is performed using various known spatial processing techniques. Various types of transceivers of this type may use beam forming, beam steering, eigen-steering, or other space technologies to increase the transmission and reception throughput of a given user terminal. In a specific embodiment for transmitting OFDM symbols, the spatial processor may include multiple subspace processors for processing each OFDM subchannel or frequency bin. 0 96870.doc 17 200525375 In a demonstration In a sexual system, an AP may have N antennas, and an exemplary υτ may have M antennas. Therefore, there are M × N paths between the antenna of the AP and the antenna of the UT. Various space technologies using these multiple paths to improve throughput are known in the art. The negative material transmitted in the Space Time Transmit Diversity (STTD) system (also referred to herein as r diversity) is formatted, coded, and treated as a single, data stream using all antennas for transmission. Using M transmitting antennas and N receiving antennas, it is possible to form MI (M, N) independent channels. Spatial multiplexing utilizes these independent paths, and different data can be transmitted on each independent path. Various techniques for learning or adjusting channel characteristics between AP and UT are known to me. A unique preamble can be transmitted from each transmission antenna. These preambles can be received and measured on each receive antenna. Channel feedback can then be passed back to the transmitting device for use during transmission. Channel reversal is a technology that allows preprocessing and transmission, but it is computationally intensive. Eigen decomposition can be performed, and lookup tables can be used to determine the transmission rate. To avoid channel decomposition, an alternative technique uses leading feature import to simplify spatial processing. Pre-distortion (pre- (jistortion) technology is a known technology used to simplify receiver processing. Therefore, according to the current channel conditions, the entire system can provide different data transmission rates for transmission to various user terminals. Specifically In terms of performance, the performance of a particular link between the AP and each UT may be higher than the performance of more than one link that can be shared by υτ. The examples are further detailed below. The wireless LAN transceiver 240 may The spatial processing used by the physical link determines the supportable transmission rate. This information can be fed back on connection 280, 96870.doc -18- 200525375 for use in MAC processing, as described in detail below. Several antennas are deployed based on the data needs of the UT. For example, a high-definition video display may include, for example, four antennas based on high-bandwidth requirements, while a PDA may use two antennas. An exemplary access point may have Four antennas. The user terminal 106 can be deployed in a manner similar to the access point 104 shown in Figure 2. If the data stream 260 is not connected to a LAN transceiver (although the UT may include (Wireless or wireless transceiver), the data stream 260 is typically received or passed to one or more applications or processes running on the UT or a device connected to the UT. The higher-level connection to the AP 104 or UT 106 may be Any type. The items described in this article are just examples. Protocol Stack Figure 3 shows an exemplary subnet protocol stack 300. The subnet protocol stack 300 can be regarded as a LAN entity layer and network between very high bit rates. Interface between the MAC layer of the circuit layer or other networks (for example, the Ethernet MAc layer or the TCP / IP network layer). Various characteristic protocol stacks can be deployed to make full use of extremely efficient wireless LAN physical layer. The exemplary protocol stack can be designed to provide various advantages, examples include ... (a) Minimizing the throughput load consumed by the protocol; (b) Maximizing the encapsulation subnet data unit to become the physical layer Frame efficiency; (c) Minimizing end-to-end round-trip transmission delay caused by delay-sensitive transmission mechanisms (eg, TCp); (d) Providing highly reliable, sequential delivery of subnet lean units ; (E) provide support for existing networks Layers and applications, and provide full flexibility to adapt to future networks and applications; and seamless integration of existing network technologies. 96870.doc -19- 200525375 The protocol stack 300 has several thin sublayers, several modes of operation, and Facility for supporting interfaces of multiple external networks. Figure 3 shows the regulation layer 3o0, the data link control layer 320, and the physical layer 240. A layer manager 38o is interconnected to each sublayer to provide various The communication and control of functions are described below. Figure 3 illustrates an exemplary protocol stack 300 configuration. The dashed lines indicate exemplary configurations of components that can be deployed in the mac processor 220, as described above. Including the adjustment layer 310, the data link control layer 320, and the layer administrator 38. As described above, in this configuration, the physical layer 240 receives and transmits MAC protocol data units (PDUs) on the connection 270. The feedback connection 280 is directed to the layer manager "ο in order to provide physical layer information for use in the various functions described below. This example is merely illustrative. Those skilled in the art should understand that in this Within the scope of the invention, any number of components can be deployed and configured to include any combination of the described stacking functions. The adjustment layer 310 provides an interface to higher layers. For example, the adjustment layer can interface to the IP stack (for IP Conditioning), Ethernet mac (for Ethernet conditioning), or various other network layers. The data stream 260 may be received from one or more higher layers for MAC processing and transmitted on the physical layer 240. Data Stream 26 can also be received, processed, and recombined through the trajectory layer for delivery to one or more higher layers. The adjustment layer 3 10 includes the following functions: segmentation and reassembly 3 12, stream classification 3 14 and multicast mapping 3 16. Data stream classification function 3 丨 4 Check header packets (from data stream 260) received from the souther layer, map each packet to a user terminal or a multicast group MAC identifier (MAC ID ) And base Packets are classified based on quality of service (QoS) differential treatment. Multicast mapping function 96870.doc -20- 200525375 316 decides whether to use multicast MAC ID (called "MAC layer multicast") to transmit multicast usage Data, or transmitting multicast user data through multiple unicast MAC IDs (referred to as "Adjustment Layer Multicast"), examples are described in detail below. Segmentation and Reassembly (SAR) Function 3 12 Adjusts each higher-layer packet to become a protocol data unit (PDU) size suitable for Logical Link (LL) mode. The SAR function 312 is performed individually for each MAC ID. The data stream classification function 314 is a common function. The data link control layer 320 includes a logical link (LL) layer 330, a radio link control (RLC) layer 340, a system configuration control 3 50, a MUX function 360, and a common MAC function 370. The sub-blocks of each of these layers are shown in Figure 3 and will be described in detail below. The blocks shown in the figure are only examples. A subset of their functions and additional functions may be deployed in alternative embodiments. The physical layer 240 may be any type of physical layer, as described in the examples described above. An exemplary embodiment uses a MIMO OFDM physical layer. The following description contains exemplary parameters of this specific embodiment. The layer manager 380 (LM) interfaces with the adjustment layer 310, the data link control layer 320, and the physical layer 240 to manage QoS, admission control, and physical layer transmitter and receiver parameter control. Note that feedback from the physical layer 280 can be used in performing the functions described in this article. For example, in multicast mapping 316 or split and recombine 312, supported transmission rates applicable to various UTs can be used. Adjustment layer Data stream classification (FLCL) function 3 14 Checks the packet header 96870.doc -21-200525375 of the incoming packet, and maps it into a data stream. In the exemplary embodiment of performing IP adjustment, the following fields can be used for data flow classification: (a) IP source address and destination address; (b) IP source port and destination port; (c) IP DiffServ Code Point (DSCP; IP DiffServ code indicator); (d) Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) messages; and (e) Real-time Transport Control Protocol (RTC) messages and Real-time Transport Protocol (Real-time Transport Control Protocol) -time Transport Protocol; RTP) header. In an exemplary embodiment for performing Ethernet tuning, data flow classification may use 802.lp and 802.1q header fields. Ethernet traffic can also be classified using IP traffic, but this will cause layer violations. Those skilled in the art should understand that various other types of data stream classification can be deployed as alternatives. FLCL 314 determines whether an identified data stream 260 is mapped to an existing MAC ID, Logical Link (LL) mode, and data stream ID (as described in detail below). If the incoming packet is mapped to an existing data stream, FLCL forwards the packet for further processing to the segmentation and reassembly (SAR) function 3 12. If a new MAC ID is requested, a request is forwarded to the association control function 344 in radio link control (RLC) 340. If a new data stream with an existing MAC ID is identified, the QoS manager function 382 in the layer manager 380 determines the type of logical link mode required for the data stream. If a new LL mode is initialized, the request is forwarded to the LLC function 338 corresponding to the MAC ID in order to handle the mode negotiation. If a new data stream is built into the existing LL model, the request will be transferred to the LLC function 3 38. The joint application filed on November 26, 2003, US Patent 96870.doc -22- 200525375 Application No. 1 〇 / 723,346 entitled "QUALITY OF SERVICE SCHEDULER FOR A WIRELESS NETWORK" details the specific embodiment of maintaining the QoS queue, and this patent has been assigned to the assignee of the present invention. In the case of IP or Ethernet multicasting, the multicast mapping function 316 determines whether to map the packet to a multicast MAC ID in order to process the packet using MAC layer multicasting, or whether to process the packet. Processing becomes multiple unicast transmissions (referred to herein as "Adaptation Layer Multicast". If the packet is to be processed into multiple unicast transmissions, the multicast mapping function 3 16 will copy Multiple copies of the packet (each copy is used for each unicast MAC ID where the packet is to be transmitted) and forwarded to the segmentation and reassembly (SAR) function 3 12. Refer to the figure below 15 to Figure 16 to explain this aspect in detail. As described in the previous paragraph, the data flow classification function 3 14 maps a packet to a MAC ID, LL mode and data flow ID (if any). Segmentation and reassembly function 3 12 Divides higher-layer packets (ie, IP data elements or Ethernet frames) into multiple segments suitable for transmission over a logical link mode. Details will be described below with reference to FIGS. 17 to 18 The demonstration of this aspect In this example, a one-tuple adjustment layer header for each segment is added to allow the segments to be reorganized when they are sequentially passed to the corresponding SAR function in the receiver. Then, the adjustments Layer protocol data unit (PDU) is passed to the data link control layer 320 for processing in accordance with the classification parameters: MAC ID, LL mode and data flow ID. Data link control layer Figure 4 shows user data traveling through each layer Packet 410 (ie, IP data 96870.doc -23- 200525375 yuan, Ethernet frame or other packet). In this illustration, the exemplary field size and type will be described. Those familiar with this technology should understand Various other sizes, types, and configurations are considered to be within the scope of the present invention. As shown in the figure, the data packet 410 is divided into fragments at the adjustment layer 310. Each adjustment sub-layer PDU 430 carries its own fragment 420 In this example, the data packet 410 is divided into N fragments 420A-N. A conditioning sub-layer PDU 430 includes a packet payload 434 containing a corresponding fragment 420. A type field 432 (in this example In one Bytes) are attached to the conditioning sub-layer PDU 430. At the logical link (LL) layer 330, an LL header 442 (4 bytes in this example) is attached to the conditioning sub-layer containing the conditioning sub-layer. The packet carrying 434 of PDU 430. Exemplary information of the LL header 442 includes a data flow identification item, control information and serial number. The header 442 and the packet carrying 444 are used to calculate and append a CRC 446, thereby forming a Logical link sub-layer PDU (LL PDU) 440. In a similar manner, logical link control (LLC) 338 and radio link control (RLC) 340 (described in detail below) constitute LLC PDUs and RLC PDUs. LL PDU 440 and LLC PDU and RLC PDU are all placed in a queue (ie, a high QoS queue 362, a best effort queue 364, or a control message queue 366) to be served by the MUX function 360 . The MUX function 360 attaches a MUX header 452 to each LL PDU 440. An exemplary MUX header 452 may include a length and a type (in this example, the header 452 is 2 bytes). A similar header can be formed for each control PDU (ie, LLC PDU and RLC PDU). The LL PDU 440 (or, LLC or RLC PDU) constitutes a packet bearer 454. The header 452 and the packet bearer 454 96870.doc -24- 200525375 constitute the MUX sub-layer PDU (MPDU) 450 (MUX sub-layer PDU is also referred to as MUX PDU in this article). The MAC protocol allocates communication resources on the shared media in a series of MAC frames. The MAC scheduler 376 determines the physical layer burst size configured for one or more MAC IDs in each MAC frame (labeled as MAC frame f, where f indicates a certain special MAC frame). Please note that not all MAC IDs containing the data to be transmitted will be allocated in the space of any particular MAC frame. Any access control or scheduling mechanism can be deployed and is within the scope of the present invention. When performing a configuration operation for a MAC ID, the MUX function 360 corresponding to the MAC ID will constitute a MAC PDU 460, which includes one or more MUX PDUs 450 to be included in the MAC frame f. One or more MAC PDUs 460 of one or more configured MAC IDs are included in a MAC frame (ie, MAC frame 500 described in detail below with reference to FIG. 5). In an exemplary embodiment, an aspect allows transmission of a local MPDU 450, thereby allowing efficient packaging in a MAC PDU 460. This aspect will be explained in detail below. In this example, MUX function 360 maintains an untransmitted byte count of any local MPDU 450 left over from a previous transmission (identified by local MPDU 464). Their bytes 464 are transmitted before any new PDUs 466 (ie, LL PDUs or control PDUs) in the current frame. The header 462 (2 bytes in this example) includes a MUX indicator to point to the beginning of the first new MPDU (MPDU 466A in this example) to be transmitted in the current frame. The header 462 may also include a MAC address. MAC PDU 460 includes the MUX indicator 462, a possible local MUX PDU 464 at the beginning (left from the previous configuration), followed by zero or 96870.doc • 25-200525375 multiple full MUX PDUs 466A-N and A possible local MUX PDU 468 (from the current configuration) or other padding used to fill the configured portion of the physical layer burst. MAC PDU 460 is carried in the physical layer burst that has been configured for the MAC ID. Common MAC, MAC Frame, and Transmission Channel FIG. 5 illustrates an exemplary MAC frame 500. The common MAC function 370 manages the MAC frame 500 configuration between the following transmission channel segments. Broadcast, control, forward and reverse traffic (referred to as download link phase and upload link phase, respectively), and random access. The MAC frame function 372 can use various components to form a frame, which will be described in detail below. Exemplary functions, encoding, and transmission channel duration are detailed below. In this exemplary embodiment, time division duplex processing (TDD) —MAC frame is performed within a time interval of 2 ms (milliseconds). The MAC frame 500 is divided into five transmission channels (appearing in the order of 5 10-550 shown in the figure). Alternative sequences and different frame sizes can be deployed in alternative embodiments. The duration of the MAC frame 500 configuration can be quantized into a small common time interval. In an exemplary embodiment, quantization is performed in units of 800 ns (nanoseconds, which is also the cyclic prefix duration of short or long OFDM symbols, which will be described in detail below). Duration of MAC frame 500 configuration. The short OFDM symbol is 4.0 (microseconds) or 5 times 800 ns. The exemplary MAC provides five transmission channels in one MAC frame ... (a) Broadcast Channel (BCH) 510 for carrying Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH); (b) Control Channel (Control 96870.doc • 26- 200525375

Channel ; CCH)520,用於在正向鏈路上載送訊框控制頻道 (Frame Control Channel ; FCCH)及隨機存取反饋頻道 (Random Access Feedback Channel ; RFCH) ; (c)流量步員 (Traffic Channel; TCH),用於載送使用者資料及控制資訊, 並且被細分成⑴正向鏈路上的正向流量頻道(F〇fWai>d Traffic Channel ; F-TCH)530,及(ii)反向鏈路上的反向流量 頻道(Reverse Traffic Channel ; R-TCH)540 ;以及(d)隨機;# 取頻道(Random Access Channel ; RCH)550,用於载送存取 要求頻道(Access Request Channel ; ARCH)(用於 UT存取要 求)。還會在片段510中傳輸一前導引導訊號(pilot beacon)。 下載鏈路階段的訊框500包括片段510-530。上載鏈路階 段包括片段540-550。片段560指示一後續MAC訊框開始。 廣播頻道(BCH) 由AP傳輸廣播頻道(BCH)及引導訊號510。BCH 510的第 一部分包含共同實體層添加項(common physical layer overhead),例如,前導訊號,包括時序和頻率獲取前導。 在一項示範性具體實施例中,引導訊號(beacon)係由下列項 目所組成:由UT進行頻率和時序獲取所使用的2個短型 OFDM符號;之後接續是υτ用來評估頻道的共同ΜΙΜΟ前導 之8個短型OFDM符號。 BCH 5 1〇的第二部分是資料部分。BCH資料部分定義關於 傳輸頻道片段的MAC訊框配置:CCH 520、F_TCH 530、 R-TCH 540和rch 550,並且還定義關於子頻道的CCH組 合。在此實例中,BCH 5 10定義無線LAN 120的涵蓋範圍, 96870.doc -27- 200525375 並且會在可用的大部分強固型資料傳輸模式中予以傳輸。 整個BCH的長度為固定。在一項示範性具體實施例中,BCH 定義ΜΙΜΟ-WLAN的涵蓋範圍,並且會使用比率1/4碼之二 進位相移鍵控(Binary Phase Shift Keying ; BPSK)在空間時 間傳輸分集(Space Time Transmit Diversity ; STTD)模式中 予以傳輸。在此實例中,BCH的長度固定為10個短型OFDM 符號。 控制頻道(CCH) 控制頻道(CCH)520係由AP予以傳輸,並且定義MAC訊框 餘項之組合。共同MAC功能370的控制頻道功能374產生 CCH。下文會詳細說明CCH的示範性具體實施例。會使用 高強固型傳輸模式在多個子頻道中傳輸CCH 520,每個子 頻道各具有不同的資料傳輸率。第一個子頻道最為強固, 並預期所有UT都可予以解碼。在一項示範性具體實施例 中,會針對第一個CCH子頻道使用比率1/4碼之bpsk。還可 以使用數個其他子頻道,彼等子頻道的強固性會遞減(且效 率會遞增)。在一項示範性具體實施例中,至多會使用三個 額外子頻道。每個UT都會嘗試依序解碼所有子頻道,直到 解碼失敗。每個訊框中的C C Η傳輸頻道片段為可變長度, 長度取決於每個子頻道中的CCH訊息數量。會在cch的最 強固(第一)子頻道上載送反向鏈路隨機存取叢發之認可 (acknowledgment) 〇 CC Η包含有關正向鏈路和反向鏈路的實體層叢發指派。 指派可能是用於在正向鍵路或反向鍵路上傳送資料。一般 96870.doc -28- 200525375 而吕,一實體層叢發指派包括··(a)_MAC ID ; (b)一用於 · 指不訊框内配置開始時間的值(在F-TCH或R_TCH)中;(c) 配置的長度;⑷專用實體層添加項的長度;⑷傳輸模式,·, 以及(f)用於實體層叢發的編碼和調變機制。一 MACID識別, 一用於多個單點播送傳輸的單一υτ或用於多點播送傳輸 的一組UT。在此示範性具體實施例中,還會指派一用於傳 輸至所有UT的唯一廣播MAC ID。在一項示範性具體實施例 中,貫體層添加項包括一由〇、4或8個短型〇FDM符號所組鲁 成的ΜΙΜΟ前導。在此實例中,傳輸模式是STTD或空間多 工〇 有關CCH的其他示範類型指派包括:一有關用於從—υτ 專輸專用則V之反向鍵路的指派;或一有關用於從一 υτ 傳輸一緩衝器和鏈路狀態資訊之反向鏈路的指派。CCH也 可以定義訊框之保留未使用部分。υτ可使用訊框的彼等未 使用部分來進行雜訊底限(及干擾)評估以及量測鄰近系統 之引導訊號。下文會詳細說明控制頻道的示範性具體實施 鲁 例0 隨機存取頻道(RCH) 隨機存取頻道(RCH)550是UT可用於傳輸一隨機存取叢 么的反向鏈路頻道。會在RCH中指定每個訊框的rch可變 長度在一項示範性具體實施例中,會使用比率1 /4碼BPSK 的主要特徵模態(eigenmode)來傳輸隨機存取叢發。 在此示範性具體實施例中會定義兩種類型隨機存取叢 、§八?必須使用一滑動關聯器(sliding correlator)來偵測 96870.doc -29· 200525375 存取叢發的起始處時,υτ會使用一長型叢發來進行起始存 取。一旦UT向一 ΑΡ註冊,鏈路的兩端會完成一時序調整程 序。在時序調整之後,UT可以用同步於RCH上之時槽時序 的方式來傳輸其隨機存取叢發。接著,UT會使用一短型叢 發來進行隨機存取。在一項示範性具體實施例中,一長型 叢發是4個短型OFDM符號,而一短型叢發是2個短型OFDM 符號。 正向流量頻道(F-TCH) 正向流量頻道(F-TCH)530包括從AP 104傳輸的一或多個 實體層叢發。會按照CCH指派中的指示,將每個叢發導向 至一特殊MAC ID。每個叢發各包括專用實體層添加項(例 如,前導訊號(若有的話)),以及一按照傳輸模式及在CCH 指派中指示之編碼和調變機制所傳輸的MAC PDU。F-TCH 屬於可變長度。在一項示範性具體實施例中,專用實體層 添加項可包括一專用ΜΙΜΟ前導。 在一項示範性具體實施例中,在STTD模式中,有一個同 等級空間分集頻道的效能會在每短型OFDM符號12個位元 (有關48個音頻(tone)的比率1/2碼RPSK)與每長型OFDM符 號1344個位元(有關192個音頻的比率7/8碼256 QAM)之間 變化。這會轉譯為在峰值實體層資料傳輸率範圍内的33因 子(或在此實例中為3-99 Mbps)。Channel; CCH) 520, used to upload Frame Control Channel (FCCH) and Random Access Feedback Channel (RFCH); (c) Traffic Channel (Traffic Channel) TCH), which is used to carry user data and control information, and is subdivided into forward traffic channels (F0fWai> d Traffic Channel; F-TCH) 530 on the forward link, and (ii) reverse Reverse Traffic Channel (R-TCH) 540 on the link; and (d) random; #Random Access Channel (RCH) 550, used to carry the Access Request Channel (ARCH) ) (For UT access requirements). A pilot beacon is also transmitted in segment 510. The frame 500 of the download link phase includes fragments 510-530. The upload link phase includes fragments 540-550. Segment 560 indicates the start of a subsequent MAC frame. Broadcast Channel (BCH) The AP transmits the broadcast channel (BCH) and the pilot signal 510. The first part of BCH 510 contains common physical layer overhead, such as preamble signals, including timing and frequency acquisition preambles. In an exemplary embodiment, the pilot signal (beacon) is composed of the following two short OFDM symbols used by the UT for frequency and timing acquisition; followed by a common MIM used to evaluate the channel The leading 8 short OFDM symbols. The second part of BCH 5 10 is the data part. The BCH data section defines the MAC frame configuration for transmission channel segments: CCH 520, F_TCH 530, R-TCH 540, and rch 550, and also defines the CCH combination for subchannels. In this example, BCH 5 10 defines the coverage of wireless LAN 120, 96870.doc -27- 200525375 and will be transmitted in most of the rugged data transmission modes available. The length of the entire BCH is fixed. In an exemplary embodiment, the BCH defines the coverage of MIMO-WLAN and uses Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK) at a ratio of 1/4 yards in space time transmission diversity (Space Time Transmit Diversity; STTD) mode. In this example, the length of the BCH is fixed at 10 short OFDM symbols. Control Channel (CCH) Control Channel (CCH) 520 is transmitted by the AP and defines the combination of the remaining items of the MAC frame. The control channel function 374 of the common MAC function 370 generates a CCH. Exemplary specific embodiments of the CCH are described in detail below. The CCH 520 is transmitted in multiple sub-channels using a high-rugged transmission mode, each with a different data transmission rate. The first subchannel is the strongest and is expected to be decoded by all UTs. In an exemplary embodiment, a 1/4 code bpsk is used for the first CCH subchannel. Several other sub-channels can also be used, and the robustness of their sub-channels will diminish (and the efficiency will increase). In an exemplary embodiment, at most three additional subchannels will be used. Each UT will try to decode all subchannels in sequence until the decoding fails. The C C Η transmission channel segment of each frame is of variable length, and the length depends on the number of CCH messages in each sub-channel. Acknowledgment of reverse link random access bursts will be uploaded on the strongest (first) subchannel of cch. CC Η includes physical layer burst assignments for forward and reverse links. Assignments may be used to transfer data on the forward or reverse bond. Generally 96870.doc -28- 200525375 and Lu, a physical layer burst assignment includes ... (a) _MAC ID; (b) one is used to refer to the value of the configuration start time (in F-TCH or R_TCH) ); (C) the length of the configuration; ⑷ the length of the item added to the dedicated entity layer; ⑷ the transmission mode, ·, and (f) the encoding and modulation mechanism used for the entity layer burst. A MACID identification, a single υτ for multiple unicast transmissions or a set of UTs for multicast transmissions. In this exemplary embodiment, a unique broadcast MAC ID is also assigned for transmission to all UTs. In an exemplary embodiment, the penetration layer add-on includes a MIMO preamble composed of 0, 4 or 8 short OFDM symbols. In this example, the transmission mode is STTD or spatial multiplexing. Other exemplary types of assignments related to CCH include: an assignment related to the reverse key path for the dedicated input V from -υτ; or an assignment related to the υτ The assignment of a reverse link that transmits a buffer and link state information. The CCH can also define the unused portion of the frame. υτ can use their unused portions of the frame to perform noise floor (and interference) assessments and to measure pilot signals from nearby systems. The exemplary implementation of the control channel will be described in detail below. Example 0 Random Access Channel (RCH) Random Access Channel (RCH) 550 is a reverse link channel that the UT can use to transmit a random access cluster. The variable-length rch of each frame will be specified in the RCH. In an exemplary embodiment, the main characteristic mode (eigenmode) of the ratio 1/4 code BPSK will be used to transmit random access bursts. In this exemplary embodiment, two types of random access clusters are defined. A sliding correlator must be used to detect 96870.doc -29 · 200525375 When accessing the start of a burst, υτ will use a long burst for initial access. Once the UT registers with an AP, both ends of the link will complete a timing adjustment procedure. After timing adjustment, the UT can transmit its random access bursts by synchronizing with the time slot timing on the RCH. The UT then uses a short burst for random access. In an exemplary embodiment, a long burst is 4 short OFDM symbols, and a short burst is 2 short OFDM symbols. Forward Traffic Channel (F-TCH) The Forward Traffic Channel (F-TCH) 530 includes one or more physical layer bursts transmitted from the AP 104. Each burst will be directed to a special MAC ID in accordance with the instructions in the CCH assignment. Each burst includes a dedicated physical layer addition (for example, a preamble signal, if any), and a MAC PDU transmitted in accordance with the transmission mode and the coding and modulation mechanism indicated in the CCH assignment. F-TCH is of variable length. In an exemplary embodiment, the dedicated entity layer addition may include a dedicated MIMO preamble. In an exemplary embodiment, in the STTD mode, the performance of a spatial diversity channel of the same level will be 12 bits per short OFDM symbol (the ratio of 48 tones 1/2 code RPSK ) And 1344 bits per long OFDM symbol (a ratio of 192 tones of 7/8 codes 256 QAM). This translates to a factor of 33 (or 3-99 Mbps in this example) within the range of the peak physical layer data rate.

在此實例中,可使用一至多四個平行空間頻道的空間多 工模式。每個空間頻道都會使用一適當的編碼和調變機 制,其效率係在每短型OFDM符號12個位元與每長型OFDM 96870.doc -30- 200525375 符號1344個位元之間。因此,空間多工模式中的峰值實體 層資料傳輸率範圍係在3與395 Mbps之間。由於空間處理約 束限制’導致並非所有的平行空間頻道都能夠在最高效率 下運作’所以有關峰值實體層資料傳輸率的最實用限制可 能是240 Mbps,在此實例中為介於最低傳輸率與最高傳輸 率之間的80因子。 反向流量頻道(R-TCH) 反向流量頻道(R-TCH)540包括從一或多個UT 106傳輸的 實體層叢發傳輸。按照CCH指派中的指示,每個叢發係由 一特殊UT予以傳輸。每個叢發各包括一前導訊號前導項In this example, a spatial multiplexing mode of one to four parallel spatial channels may be used. Each spatial channel uses an appropriate coding and modulation mechanism. Its efficiency is between 12 bits per short OFDM symbol and 1344 bits per long OFDM 96870.doc -30- 200525375 symbol. Therefore, the peak physical layer data rate in the spatial multiplexing mode is between 3 and 395 Mbps. Due to space processing constraints, 'not all parallel spatial channels can operate at maximum efficiency', the most practical limit on peak physical layer data transfer rate is probably 240 Mbps, which in this example is between the lowest transfer rate and the highest 80 factor between transmission rates. Reverse Traffic Channel (R-TCH) The Reverse Traffic Channel (R-TCH) 540 includes a physical layer burst transmission transmitted from one or more UTs 106. According to the instructions in the CCH assignment, each burst is transmitted by a special UT. Each burst includes a preamble leading item

(pilot preamble)(若有的話),以及一按照傳輸模式及在ccH 指派中指示之編碼和調變機制所傳輸的MAC PDU。R-TCH 屬於可變長度。在一項示範性具體實施例中,如同F_Tch, 在STTD模式中的資料傳輸率範圍為3至98 Mbps,在空間多 工模式中的資料傳輸率範圍為3至395 Mbps,或許240 Mbps 是最實用的限制。 在此示範性具體實施例中,F-TCH 530、R-TCH 540或兩 者都可使用空間多工或分碼多向近接技術,藉此允許同時 傳輸相關聯於不同UT的MAC PDU。一包含MAC PDU所相 關聯之MAC ID的欄位(即,上載鏈路上的寄件者,或下載 鏈路上的預定收件者)可被包括MAC PDU標頭中。可使用此 欄位來解決當使用空間多工或CDMA時所引發的定址語意 模糊(ambiguity)。在替代具體實施例中,如果多工係嚴格 依據分時技術,則由於在用於配置MAC訊框中一既定時槽 96870.doc -31 - 200525375 給一特定MAC ID的CCH訊息中包括了定址資訊’所以MAC PDU標頭中不需要M AC ID。可部署空間多工、分碼多工、 分時多工和此項技術中已知的任何其他技術。 會起始註冊期間,每個作用中UT都被指派一 MAC ID。 MAC ID指派是由RLC 340的關聯控制(AC)功能344予以處 理。會為正向鏈路上的廣播傳輸配置一個唯一 MAC ID。廣 播傳輸屬於正向傳輸頻道(Forward TransPort channel ; F-TCH)之一部分,並且會透過使用唯一廣播MAC ID來使用 控制頻道(CCH)予以指派。在此實例中,會使用一廣播MAC ID配置,每16個訊框廣播一系統識別訊息一次。使用者資 料廣播也可以使用廣播MAC ID。 可以為正向鏈路上的廣播傳輸配置一組由一或多個MAC ID組成的集合。多點播送傳輸屬於F-TCH之一部分’並且 會透過使用一指派給一特定多點播送群組的特定多點播送 MAC ID來使用CCH予以指派。指派一MAC ID給,組111群 組是由RLC 340的關聯控制(AC)功能344予以處理。 現在重新說明圖3所示的共同MAC 370。位於AP處的隨機1 存取控制功能378處理來自使用者之存取叢發認玎。連同# 認可,AP必須立即進行R-TCH配置,以便獲得來自UT的缓 衝器狀態資訊。此要求被轉遞至排程器376。 在UT處,一隨機存取管理員依據其MUX佇列中的資料U 及其現有配置來決定何時傳輸一存取叢發。當UT由於現有 LL連接而具有一週期性配置時,則可使用現有的R-TCH配 置來提供叢發狀態資訊。 96870.doc -32- 200525375 依據接收自υτ的緩衝器和鏈路狀態訊息中所包含的資 訊,位於ΑΡ處的對應MUX功能360會更新UT代理伺服器 (proxy)。UT代理伺服器(proxy)維護UT的MUX功能緩衝器 狀態,排程器376會使用彼等狀態來進行R-TCH配置。UT 代理伺服器(proxy)還會維護AP在F-TCH上傳輸至UT的最 大傳輸率。 位於AP的共同MAC功能370實行排程器376,以便仲裁UT 間之配置,同時高效率利用每個MAC訊框。為了限制添加 項,並非會在每個訊框中為所有作用中UT配置一實體層叢 發。 排程器376可運用下列資訊在每個MAC訊框中進行配置: 1·每個MAC ID的標稱配置。可能在任何訊框中僅有作用 中UT之子集才會被指派一標稱配置。例如,僅每隔一訊框 或每第四個訊框等等,才會為某些UT提供一標稱配置。標 稱配置係由層管理員380中的許可控制功能384予以決定。 在一項示範性具體實施例中,會就OFDM符號數量而論來進 行標稱配置。 2·專用實體層添加項(例如,前導訊號)配置。RLC 340中 的無線電資源控制(Radio Resource Control ; RRC)342決定 專用實體層添加項的必要長度及週期性。在一項示範性具 體實施例中,專用實體層添加項包括一專用ΜΙΜΟ前導。 3.傳輸模式及傳輸率。這是由用於R_TCH的RRC 342所決 定且被提供給排程器376。對於F-TCH,這資訊係獲自UT 的鏈路和緩衝器狀態訊息,並且係在UT代理伺服器(proxy) 96870.doc -33- 200525375 予以維護。 4.每個MAC ID的資料積存(backlog)。排程器376可從下 列各項取得此項資訊:用於正向鏈路的每個MAC ID之MUX 功能360 ;以及用於反向鏈路的UT代理伺服器(proxy)。 此外,排程器還會配置RCH的持續時間,以及決定CCH 的持續時間。會使用四個編碼機制之一(依據UT的頻道品 質),在CCH上傳輸每項指派。因此,CCH的持續時間是指 派數量與用於傳輸每項指派之編碼機制的函數。 依據排程器所決定的配置,位於AP的MAC實體會填入 (populate)每項指派的參數,以便建構BCH和CCH。BCH定 義關於傳輸頻道片段的MAC訊框配置:CCH、F-TCH、 R-TCH和RCH,並且還定義關於子頻道的CCH組合,如上 文參考圖5之說明所述。下文詳細說明示範性CCH。 在一項示範性具體實施例中,會在至多四個子頻道之一 (依據UT的頻道品質,每個子頻道各使用一不同的編碼和調 變機制)中,在CCH上傳輸每項指派。會使用最強固的編碼 機制(第一個子頻道或子片段)來傳輸多點播送和廣播指 派。位於UT上的MAC實體讀取CCH,以便決定用於該訊框 之本身的正向鏈路和反向鏈路配置。 在發射器處,MAC功能在F-TCH(位於AP處)或R-TCH(位 於UT處)上配置給一特定MAC ID的實體層叢發上傳輸相關 聯於該特定MAC ID的MAC PDU。在接收器處,MAC功能 依據CCH指派來擷取相對應於一 MAC ID的MAC PDU,並 且將其傳遞至該MAC ID的MUX功能。 96870.doc -34- 200525375(pilot preamble), if any, and a MAC PDU transmitted in accordance with the transmission mode and the coding and modulation mechanism indicated in the ccH assignment. R-TCH is of variable length. In an exemplary embodiment, like F_Tch, the data transmission rate range in the STTD mode is 3 to 98 Mbps, and the data transmission rate range in the space multiplex mode is 3 to 395 Mbps, perhaps 240 Mbps is the most Practical limitations. In this exemplary embodiment, F-TCH 530, R-TCH 540, or both can use spatial multiplexing or code division multidirectional proximity technology, thereby allowing simultaneous transmission of MAC PDUs associated with different UTs. A field containing the MAC ID associated with the MAC PDU (ie, the sender on the upload link, or the intended recipient on the download link) can be included in the MAC PDU header. This field can be used to resolve the ambiguity of addressing semantics caused when using spatial multiplexing or CDMA. In an alternative embodiment, if the multiplexing system is strictly based on time-sharing technology, the addressing is included in the CCH message for a specific MAC ID in a MAC slot configured with a given time slot 96870.doc -31-200525375 Information 'so M AC ID is not needed in the MAC PDU header. Space multiplexing, code division multiplexing, time division multiplexing, and any other technique known in the art can be deployed. During the initial registration, each active UT is assigned a MAC ID. MAC ID assignment is handled by the Association Control (AC) function 344 of the RLC 340. A unique MAC ID is configured for broadcast transmissions on the forward link. Broadcast transmission is part of the Forward TransPort channel (F-TCH) and is assigned using the control channel (CCH) by using a unique broadcast MAC ID. In this example, a broadcast MAC ID configuration is used, and a system identification message is broadcasted every 16 frames. User information broadcasts can also use broadcast MAC IDs. A set of one or more MAC IDs can be configured for broadcast transmission on the forward link. The multicast transmission is part of the F-TCH 'and will be assigned using the CCH by using a specific multicast MAC ID assigned to a specific multicast group. A MAC ID is assigned to the group 111. The group is processed by the association control (AC) function 344 of the RLC 340. The common MAC 370 shown in FIG. 3 will now be explained again. The random 1 access control function 378 located at the AP processes the access burst authentication from the user. Along with # approval, the AP must immediately perform R-TCH configuration in order to obtain buffer status information from the UT. This request is forwarded to the scheduler 376. At UT, a random access manager decides when to transmit an access burst based on the data U in its MUX queue and its existing configuration. When the UT has a periodic configuration due to the existing LL connection, the existing R-TCH configuration can be used to provide burst status information. 96870.doc -32- 200525375 According to the information contained in the buffer and link status message received from υτ, the corresponding MUX function 360 located at AP will update the UT proxy server. The UT proxy server maintains the MUX function buffer status of the UT, and the scheduler 376 uses them to perform R-TCH configuration. The UT proxy server also maintains the maximum transmission rate from the AP to the UT on the F-TCH. The common MAC function 370 at the AP implements the scheduler 376 to arbitrate the configuration between the UTs while using each MAC frame with high efficiency. In order to limit the additions, a physical layer cluster is not configured for all active UTs in each frame. The scheduler 376 can use the following information to configure each MAC frame: 1. The nominal configuration of each MAC ID. It is possible that in any frame only a subset of the active UTs will be assigned a nominal configuration. For example, only every other frame or every fourth frame, etc. will provide a nominal configuration for some UTs. The nominal configuration is determined by the admission control function 384 in the layer administrator 380. In an exemplary embodiment, a nominal configuration is made in terms of the number of OFDM symbols. 2. Dedicated entity layer addition (for example, preamble signal) configuration. The Radio Resource Control (RRC) 342 in RLC 340 determines the necessary length and periodicity of the dedicated entity layer addition. In an exemplary embodiment, the dedicated entity layer addition includes a dedicated MIMO preamble. 3. Transmission mode and transmission rate. This is determined by RRC 342 for R_TCH and provided to scheduler 376. For F-TCH, this information is obtained from the UT's link and buffer status information, and is maintained on the UT proxy 96870.doc -33- 200525375. 4. Backlog of each MAC ID. The scheduler 376 can obtain this information from the following items: the MUX function 360 for each MAC ID of the forward link; and the UT proxy server for the reverse link. In addition, the scheduler configures the duration of the RCH and determines the duration of the CCH. Each assignment is transmitted on the CCH using one of the four encoding mechanisms (depending on the channel quality of the UT). Therefore, the duration of the CCH is a function of the number of assignments and the encoding mechanism used to transmit each assignment. According to the configuration determined by the scheduler, the MAC entity located at the AP will populate each assigned parameter in order to construct the BCH and CCH. The BCH defines the MAC frame configuration on the transmission channel segments: CCH, F-TCH, R-TCH, and RCH, and also defines the CCH combination on the sub-channels, as described above with reference to FIG. 5. Exemplary CCH is detailed below. In an exemplary embodiment, each assignment is transmitted on the CCH in one of up to four subchannels (each subchannel uses a different encoding and modulation mechanism depending on the channel quality of the UT). Multicast and broadcast assignments are transmitted using the strongest encoding mechanism (the first subchannel or subfragment). The MAC entity located on the UT reads the CCH in order to determine the forward link and reverse link configuration for the frame itself. At the transmitter, the MAC function transmits the MAC PDU associated with the specific MAC ID on the F-TCH (located at the AP) or R-TCH (located at the UT) to the physical layer of a specific MAC ID. At the receiver, the MAC function retrieves the MAC PDU corresponding to a MAC ID according to the CCH assignment and passes it to the MUX function of the MAC ID. 96870.doc -34- 200525375

MUX 下文中將參考圖19至圖23來詳細說明MUX功能360。在接 收器處,MUX功能從由連續MAC PDU所組成的位元組流來 擷取PDU,並且將其投送至所屬的LL、LLC或RLC實體。 路徑選擇係以MUX PDU標頭中所包含的類型欄位(邏輯頻 道)為基礎。 無線電鏈路控制(RLC) 在系統初始化期間,會初始化由系統識別控制功能346 所組成的無線電鏈路控制(RLC)功能340。當UT使用來自存 取集區的MAC ID來起始存取系統時,RLC功能會指派一新 的MAC ID給該UT。接著,如果該UT加入一多點播送群組, 則可被配置額外的多點播送MAC ID。 當一新MAC ID被指派給一 UT時,RLC功能會初始化下列 每項功能的一個執行個體(instance):關聯控制(AC)功能 344、無線電資源控制(RRC)342及邏輯鏈路控制(LLC)338。 當指派一新的多點播送MAC ID時,RLC功能會初始化一新 的AC執行個體以及用於LL多點播送模式的LLC。 在此示範性具體實施例中,AP會使用廣播MAC ID,每16 個MAC訊框傳輸一系統識別參數訊息一次。系統識別參數 訊息包含網路和AP ID以及協定版本號碼。此外,系統識別 參數訊息還包含供UT起始存取系統所使用的存取MAC ID 清單。 AC功能344(a)提供UT鑑認;(b)管理UT的註冊(附加/卸 離)功能(至於多點播送MAC ID,AC功能會管理對多點播送 96870.doc -35- 200525375 群組之附加/卸離(attach/detach);以及(c)用於LL的加密金 鑰交換。 會在每個UT處初始化一個RRC執行個體342。會在AP處 初始化每作用中UT—個RRC執行個體。位於AP和UT處的 RRC功能可共用正向和反向鏈路頻道度量(若需要)。 RRC(a)管理AP和UT處的傳輸鏈和接收鏈的校準 (calibration)(空間多工傳輸模式可能需要此校準);(b)決定 用於傳至UT之傳輸的傳輸模式及傳輸率控制,並且將決定 結果提供給MAC排程器376 ; (c)決定專用實體層添加項(例 如,在R-TCH上及F-TCH上之實體層叢發傳輸所需的專用前 導)的週期性及長度;(d)管理傳至及來自一UT之傳輸的功 率控制,並將功率控制提供給PHY管理員;以及(e)決定來 自UT之R-TCH傳輸的時序調整。 邏輯鏈路(LL) 由使用者資料片段所組成之調節層PDU連同相關聯之 MAC ID、LL模式及資料流ID(若有的話)一起提供給DLC層 320。LL模式功能330新增一 LL標頭及一運用整個LL PDU 所計算得出的3位元組CRC。在示範性具體實施例中支援數 種模式。可部署認可336和否定認可334功能。還可部署無 障礙式廣播/多點播送/單點播送功能332。基於例證說明, 下列列出四個LL模式(圖23中詳示MUX PDU内的模式格式 細節)。 1.非連線式否定認可模式(模式0)。在此情況下,LL標頭 為空值(null)。此模式可運用在無障礙地轉遞調節層PDU。 96870.doc -36· 200525375 LL模式0可實作原則(policing)。廣播及多點播送MAC ID僅 提供非連線式否定認可(無障礙)模式。 2. 非連線式認可模式(模式1)。此模式係運用在傳輸調節 層PDU,而不需要相關聯於LL模式3連接建置的添加項及延 遲。LL模式1標頭包括被傳輸之LL PDU的序號,或包含被 認可之PDU的序號、由於調節層頻道被預期以低隨機LL PDU損失可能性方式及以低往返延遲方式運作,所以使用 簡單的Go-Back-N ARQ機制。 3. 連線導向式否定認可模式(模式2)。LL連線導向式否定 認可模式允許透過使用一資料流ID來多工處理數個資料 流。LL模式2可實作每資料流ID之原則。該LL模式2標頭包 包該資料流ID及12位元序號。 4. 連線導向式認可模式(模式3)。LL連線導向式認可模式 允許透過使用一資料流ID來多工處理數個資料流。LL模式3 可實作每資料流ID之原則。LL模式3標頭係由一用於識別透 過可靠連線傳輸之多個資料流的資料流ID所組成。一 12位 元序號識別LL PDU,並且一 ACK攔位指示被認可的最高接 收之序號。如同關於LL模式1之論述,由於調節層頻道被預 期以低隨機LL PDU損失可能性方式及以低往返延遲方式 運作,所以使用簡單的Go-Back-N ARQ機制。然而,也可 使用一選擇性重複ARQ機制。 邏輯鏈路控制(LLC)功能338管理邏輯鏈路模式控制。當 建置一新的LL模式時,LLC功能提供模式協商,包括: (a)QoS ··保證的傳輸率;(b)模式設定;(c)模式刪除(mode 96870.doc -37- 200525375 teardown) ; (e)模式重設;(f)LL模式2及3中的資料流ID之指 派。一端對端資料流至一 LL模式的映射係由層管理員38〇 中的QoS管理員功能382予以決定。用於初始化一新的ll模 式或新增一資料流至一現有LL模式的要求係來自於調節層 3 10,如上文所述。 系統組態控制350管理TDD MAC訊框的組態,包括引導 訊號(Beacon)和BCH的内容以及RCH的長度。 層管理員MUX Hereinafter, the MUX function 360 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 19 to 23. At the receiver, the MUX function retrieves the PDU from a byte stream consisting of consecutive MAC PDUs and delivers it to the associated LL, LLC, or RLC entity. The path selection is based on the type field (logical channel) contained in the MUX PDU header. Radio Link Control (RLC) During system initialization, a radio link control (RLC) function 340 consisting of a system identification control function 346 is initialized. When the UT uses the MAC ID from the access pool to initiate access to the system, the RLC function assigns a new MAC ID to the UT. Then, if the UT joins a multicast group, it can be configured with an additional multicast MAC ID. When a new MAC ID is assigned to a UT, the RLC function initializes an instance of each of the following functions: Association Control (AC) Function 344, Radio Resource Control (RRC) 342, and Logical Link Control (LLC) ) 338. When a new multicast MAC ID is assigned, the RLC function initializes a new AC instance and an LLC for the LL multicast mode. In this exemplary embodiment, the AP uses a broadcast MAC ID to transmit a system identification parameter message every 16 MAC frames. The system identification parameter message contains the network and AP ID and the protocol version number. In addition, the system identification parameter message also contains a list of access MAC IDs used by the UT initial access system. The AC function 344 (a) provides UT authentication; (b) manages the registration (attach / detach) function of the UT (as for the multicast MAC ID, the AC function will manage the multicast 96870.doc -35- 200525375 group Attach / detach; and (c) Encryption key exchange for LL. An RRC instance 342 will be initialized at each UT. At the AP, one UT- RRC execution per role will be initialized. Individuals. RRC functions located at AP and UT can share forward and reverse link channel metrics (if required). RRC (a) manages the calibration of transmission and receive chains at AP and UT (spatial multiplexing) The transmission mode may require this calibration); (b) determine the transmission mode and transmission rate control for transmission to the UT, and provide the decision result to the MAC scheduler 376; (c) determine the dedicated entity layer additions (such as , The dedicated preamble required for the physical layer burst transmission on the R-TCH and the F-TCH) periodicity and length; (d) manage the power control of the transmission to and from a UT, and provide the power control To the PHY administrator; and (e) determine the timing adjustments for the R-TCH transmission from the UT. Link (LL) A conditioning layer PDU composed of user data fragments is provided to the DLC layer 320 along with the associated MAC ID, LL mode, and data flow ID (if any). The LL mode function 330 adds an LL Header and a 3-byte CRC calculated using the entire LL PDU. Several modes are supported in the exemplary embodiment. The approval 336 and negative approval 334 functions can be deployed. Accessible broadcast / multiple can also be deployed On-demand / unicast function 332. Based on the illustration, the four LL modes are listed below (Figure 23 details the mode format details in the MUX PDU). 1. Non-connection negative approval mode (mode 0). In In this case, the LL header is null. This mode can be used to transfer regulatory layer PDUs without obstacles. 96870.doc -36 · 200525375 LL mode 0 can implement the policy. Broadcast and multicast Sending the MAC ID only provides a non-connected negative acknowledgement (accessibility) mode. 2. A non-connected acknowledgement mode (mode 1). This mode is used to transmit PDUs at the regulation layer and does not need to be associated with the LL mode 3 connection. Built-in additions and delays. LL Mode 1 header includes The sequence number of the LL PDU that is lost, or the sequence number of the recognized PDU, because the modulation layer channel is expected to operate with a low random LL PDU loss probability mode and a low round-trip delay mode, so a simple Go-Back-N ARQ mechanism 3. Connection-oriented negative approval mode (mode 2). LL connection-oriented negative approval mode allows multiple data streams to be multiplexed by using a data stream ID. LL mode 2 can implement the principle of each data stream ID. The LL mode 2 header packet contains the data stream ID and 12-bit serial number. 4. Connection-oriented approval mode (mode 3). LL connection-oriented approval mode allows multiple data streams to be multiplexed by using a stream ID. LL mode 3 can implement the principle of each data stream ID. The LL Mode 3 header consists of a stream ID used to identify multiple streams transmitted over a reliable connection. A 12-bit sequence number identifies the LL PDU, and an ACK bit indicates the highest received sequence number. As discussed in LL mode 1, since the adjustment layer channel is expected to operate in a low random LL PDU loss possibility mode and a low round-trip delay mode, a simple Go-Back-N ARQ mechanism is used. However, a selective repeating ARQ mechanism can also be used. A logical link control (LLC) function 338 manages logical link mode control. When establishing a new LL mode, the LLC function provides mode negotiation, including: (a) QoS · guaranteed transmission rate; (b) mode setting; (c) mode deletion (mode 96870.doc -37- 200525375 teardown ); (e) mode reset; (f) assignment of data stream ID in LL modes 2 and 3. The mapping of the end-to-end data stream to an LL mode is determined by the QoS manager function 382 in the layer manager 38. The requirements for initializing a new ll mode or adding a data stream to an existing LL mode come from the adjustment layer 3 10, as described above. The system configuration control 350 manages the configuration of the TDD MAC frame, including the boot signal (Beacon), the content of the BCH, and the length of the RCH. Layer manager

QoS管理員382解譯網路QoS協定,包括RSVP和RTCP。如 果QoS係以IP標頭之資料流分類為基礎,則Q〇s管理員會決 定要用於識別相對於不同服務的資料流分類器(即,IP來源 位址和目的地位址、IP來源埠和目的地埠)。Q〇s管理員藉 由映射資料流至LL模式來辅助調節層。 許可控制功能384接收來自LLC的要求,用於允許含傳輸 率需求的新資料流。許可控制功能維護一由已准許之標稱 配置與一組規定和臨限值所組成的資料庫。許可控制功能 依據臨限值和規定來決定是否可准許一資料流、決定該資 料流的標稱配置(就每m個MAC訊框所配置的傳輸時間量而 論)並且提供此資訊給共同MAC中的排程器。 實體層管理員使用於AP和UT處所收集的實體層度量,以 便控制實體層的發射器和接收器參數。可透過RRC訊息來 獲得遠端度量。 例證性程序 依據前文所說明各項層實體,使用數項程序來描述的 96870.doc -38- 200525375 WLAN 120運作。這些程序不是詳盡的程序,而是例證說明 本文中所描述的各項功能及組件。 圖6繪示從AP傳輸一正向鏈路訊息傳送之示範性方法 600。在步驟610,位於AP處的RLC功能(關聯控制、無線電 資源控制或邏輯鏈路控制)將一訊息(RLC PDU)置入控制訊 息佇列中。或位於AP處的LL模式將一LLPDU置入高QoS佇 列或最佳工作(best effort)仔列中。 在步驟620,排程器配置用於傳輸在三個MUX佇列中之 PDU的F_TCH資源。在步驟640,由MAC在CCH上指示該指 派。在步驟650,位於AP的MAC傳輸已配置之實體層叢發 中MAC PDU中的訊息。 圖7繪示在UT處接收一正向鏈路訊息傳送之示範性方法 700。在步驟710,UT監視CCH。UT識別一被導向至該UT 的已配置之叢發。在步驟720,UT按照CCH中的識別來擷取 MAC PDU。在步驟730,UT重組資料流封包,該資料流封 包包含在MAC PDU中擷取且在MAC處理器中處理之片段。 圖8繪示從UT傳輸一反向鏈路訊息傳送之示範性方法 800。在步驟810,位於UT處的RLC功能(關聯控制、無線電 資源控制或邏輯鏈路控制)將一訊息(RLC PDU)置入控制訊 息佇列中。或位於UT處的LL模式將一LL PDU置入高Q〇S 佇列或最佳工作(best effort)佇列中。在決策步驟820中,如 果UT具有一現有R-TCH配置,則進行到步驟870。否則,進 行到步驟830。 在步驟830,UT在RCH上傳輸一短型存取叢發。在步驟 96870.doc -39- 200525375 840,UT在CCH上接收該RCH存取叢發認可及存取授予配 置。在步驟850, UT傳輸一鏈路和緩衝器狀態訊息至該AP。 在步驟860,UT監視CCH是否有R-TCH授予配置。在步驟 870,接收一配置(或在決策步驟820中已存在)。UT將MUX PDU組成訊框而成為一MAC PDU,並且在已配置之實體層 叢發中傳輸該MAC PDU。 圖9繪示在AP處接收一反向鏈路訊息傳送之示範性方法 900。在步驟910,AP接收並且監視RCH。在步驟920,AP 識別一來自UT的短型存取叢發。在步驟930,排程器配置 一存取授予。在步驟940,AP在CCH上傳輸認可和存取授 予。在步驟950,該AP回應存取授予而在R-TCH上接收該鏈 路和緩衝器狀態訊息。在步驟960,AP使用該缓衝器狀態來 更新UT代理伺服器(proxy)。排程器具有此項資訊之存取 權。在步驟970,排程器配置R-TCH資源。在步驟980,AP 按照配置來接收MAC PDU。在步驟990,AP回應一或多個 接收之MAC PDU來執行重組一資料流封包。QoS manager 382 interprets network QoS protocols, including RSVP and RTCP. If QoS is based on the traffic classification of the IP header, the QOS administrator will decide which traffic classifier to use to identify the different services (ie, IP source and destination addresses, IP source port And destination port). The QOS administrator assists the adjustment layer by mapping the data stream to the LL mode. The admission control function 384 receives a request from the LLC to allow a new data stream with a transmission rate requirement. The admission control function maintains a database of approved nominal configurations and a set of regulations and thresholds. The admission control function determines whether a data stream can be permitted, determines the nominal configuration of the data stream (in terms of the amount of transmission time configured per m MAC frames), and provides this information to the common MAC based on thresholds and regulations Scheduler in. The physical layer administrator uses the physical layer metrics collected at the AP and UT to control the transmitter and receiver parameters of the physical layer. Remote metrics can be obtained through RRC messages. Exemplary Procedures 96870.doc -38- 200525375 WLAN 120 operation is described using several procedures based on the various layer entities described above. These programs are not exhaustive, but rather exemplify the functions and components described in this article. FIG. 6 illustrates an exemplary method 600 for transmitting a forward link message transmission from an AP. In step 610, the RLC function (association control, radio resource control, or logical link control) at the AP places a message (RLC PDU) into the control message queue. Or the LL mode at the AP places an LLPDU into a high QoS queue or a best effort queue. In step 620, the scheduler configures F_TCH resources for transmitting PDUs in the three MUX queues. In step 640, the assignment is indicated on the CCH by the MAC. At step 650, the MAC transmission located at the AP is configured to send a message in the MAC PDU in the physical layer burst. FIG. 7 illustrates an exemplary method 700 for receiving a forward link message transmission at a UT. In step 710, the UT monitors the CCH. The UT identifies a configured burst directed to the UT. In step 720, the UT retrieves the MAC PDU according to the identification in the CCH. In step 730, the UT reassembles the data stream packet, the data stream packet including the segments extracted in the MAC PDU and processed in the MAC processor. FIG. 8 illustrates an exemplary method 800 for transmitting a reverse link message from a UT. In step 810, the RLC function (association control, radio resource control, or logical link control) at the UT places a message (RLC PDU) in the control message queue. Or the LL mode at the UT places an LL PDU in a high QOS queue or a best effort queue. In decision step 820, if the UT has an existing R-TCH configuration, proceed to step 870. Otherwise, proceed to step 830. In step 830, the UT transmits a short access burst on the RCH. At step 96870.doc -39- 200525375 840, the UT receives the RCH access burst approval and access grant configuration on the CCH. In step 850, the UT transmits a link and buffer status message to the AP. At step 860, the UT monitors whether the CCH has an R-TCH grant configuration. In step 870, a configuration is received (or already exists in decision step 820). The UT composes the MUX PDU into a frame to become a MAC PDU, and transmits the MAC PDU in the configured physical layer burst. FIG. 9 illustrates an exemplary method 900 for receiving a reverse link message transmission at an AP. In step 910, the AP receives and monitors the RCH. In step 920, the AP identifies a short access burst from the UT. At step 930, the scheduler configures an access grant. In step 940, the AP transmits acknowledgement and access grants on the CCH. In step 950, the AP receives the link and buffer status messages on the R-TCH in response to the access grant. In step 960, the AP uses the buffer status to update the UT proxy server. The scheduler has access to this information. In step 970, the scheduler configures R-TCH resources. In step 980, the AP receives the MAC PDU as configured. In step 990, the AP responds to one or more received MAC PDUs to perform reassembly of a data stream packet.

圖10繪示UT執行起始存取及註冊之示範性方法1000。在 步驟1010中,UT從BCH上的頻率獲取前導來獲取頻率和時 序。在步驟1020,UT接收來自RLC廣播訊息的系統識別資 訊。在步驟1030,UT使用來自BCH的長型叢發來決定用於 (非時槽式)隨機存取的RCH配置。在步驟1040,UT從該組 起始MAC ID集合中隨機選擇一 MAC ID。在步驟1050,UT 使用該起始MAC ID在RCH上傳輸一長型隨機存取叢發。在 步驟1060, UT接收在後續MAC訊框中的一認可、一 MAC ID 96870.doc -40- 200525375 指派及一時序調整。在步驟1070, 聯控制功能與Ap關 聯控制功能完成鑑認和金鑰交換序列。正向鏈路和反向鏈 路上的控制訊息傳輸係遵循前面參考圖6至圖9說明的低層 級訊息傳送程序。 圖11繪示AP執行起始存取及註冊之示範性方法11〇〇。在 步驟mo,AP在RCH上接收來自υτ的一長型隨機存取叢 發。在步驟112〇, ΑΡ指派一 MAC ID給該υτ。由無線電鏈 路控制功能來管理MAC ID集區。在步驟113〇, Αρ指派一時 序調整給該UT。在步驟1140,AP在CCH上傳輸認可、MAC ID和時序調整。在步驟1150, AP關聯控制功能與1;][關聯控 制功能完成鑑認和金鑰交換序列。正向鏈路和反向鍵路上 的控制訊息傳輸係遵循前面參考圖6至圖9說明的低層級訊 息傳送程序。 圖12繪示AP使用者資料流之示範性方法12〇〇。在步驟 1210中,層管理員中的Q〇S管理員將資料流分類參數填入資 料流分類功能中。參數與值的一特定組合可指示出一新的 資料流抵達。彼等參數可包括:IP DiffServ 〇〇心 Point(DSCP)、IP來源位址或IP埠。乙太網路參數可包括: 802. IQ VLAN ID或802. Ip優先順序指示。特定卩埠值可指 示一要轉遞至QoS管理員的控制協定訊息(例如,Rsvp或 RTCP)。 在步驟1215, AP決定許可參數。當一封包抵達八1>調節層 且被資料流分類判定為新資料流時,資料流分類會配合 管理員運作,以便決定許可參數,包括要為該資料流配置 96870.doc -41 - 200525375 的QoS類別(高QoS或最佳工作)、LL模式及標稱傳輸率。在 決策步驟1220中,層管理員中的許可控制依據彼等許可參 數來決定是否可准許該資料流。如果不准許,則程序停止。 否則,進行到步驟1225。 在步驟1225,資料流分類要求LLC建置一新的資料流。 在此論述中,會考量高QoS、LL模式3連線之案例。在步驟 1230,位於AP的LLC與位於UT的LLC通信以建置連線(或 是,如果適用的連線已存在,則建立新的資料流ID)。在此 實例中,彼等LLC將嘗試建置LL模式3連線(或是,如果適 用的LL模式3連線已存在,則建立新的資料流ID)。在步驟 1235,將為該資料流所配置的標稱傳輸率傳達給排程器。 就LL模式3而言,會在正向頻道和反向頻道上配置標稱傳輸 率。 在步驟1240,資料流分類進行:分類該資料流的封包; 識別MAC ID、LL模式和資料流ID ;實行資料流原則;以及 轉遞符合的封包至SAR功能。在步驟1245,SAR分割封包成 為片段,並且將調節層PDU連同LL模式和資料流ID—起轉 遞至該MAC ID的LL功能。在步驟1250,LL功能附加LL標 頭及CRC,並且將LL PDU置入適當的佇列中。在此實例中, LL模式3功能附加LL標頭及CRC,並且將LLPDU置入MUX 的高QoS佇列中。 在步驟125 5,MUX藉由附加一用於識別LL模式和長度的 MUX標頭來準備MUX PDU。MUX建立一 MUX指標,用於 指示至第一個新MUX PDU之起始處的位元組數量。 96870.doc •42- 200525375 在步驟1260,排程器決定為MAC ID配置的F-TCH(實體層 叢發)。排程器知道所要使用的傳輸模式(來自RRC)及傳輸 率(來自UT代理伺服器(proxy))。請注意,也可以包含一反 向鏈路配置。在步驟1265,會在CCH上傳輸該配置。 在步驟1270,MAC傳輸MAC PDU。MAC PDU係由下列 項目所組成:MUX指標、接著是一位於起始處之可能的局 部MUX PDU、接著是零或多個完整MUX PDU以及最後是一 位於實體層叢發尾端的一可能的局部MUX PDU。 圖13繪示UT使用者資料流之示範性方法1300。在步驟 1310,UT在CCH上接收該配置。在步驟1320,UT按照該配 置來接收MAC PDU。在步驟1330,位於UT的MUX藉由使 用MUX指標及MUX標頭中的長度欄位來擷取MUX PDU,並 且準備LLPDU。在步驟1340, MUX依據MUX標頭中的類型 欄位將LL PDU傳送至適當的LL功能(在此實例中為LL模式 3)。在步驟1350, LL模式3執行ARQ接收器並且計算每個LL PDU的CRC。在步驟1360,位於UT的LL模式3必須傳輸 ACK/NAK至位於AP的LL模式3 ARQ。該ACK/NAK被置入 位於UTMUX處的高QoS佇列中。請注意,其他LL模式可不 包含認可,如上文所述。 在步驟1370,AP依據該配置在R-TCH上傳輸該 ACK/NAK 〇如上文所述,排程器會依據反向鏈路的標稱配 置來配置MAC ID的R-TCH資源。會在來自UT的反向鏈路實 體層叢發上的MAC PDU中傳輸ACK/NAK訊息。在步驟 13 80,UT可在剩餘的配置中傳輸任何其他已排入佇列中的 96870.doc -43· 200525375 反向鏈路資料。 請再次參考圖3,如上文所述,資料流260係在AP MAC 處理器220接收,並且對應之資料和發訊號會向下行進通過 調節層310、資料鏈路控制層32〇及實體層,以便傳輸至 UT。位於UT的實體層24〇接收mac PDU,並且對應之資料 和發訊號會向上行進通過UT MAC處理器220中的資料鏈路 控制層320及調節層3 1 〇實體層,已重組之資料流係要傳遞 至一或多個較高層級之各層(即,各種處理序,包括資料、 語音、視訊等等)。對於源自於UT且傳輸至AP的資料流, 則類似的處理序會以反向順序發生。 可以在AP和UT中部署各自的層管理員380,藉此控制資 訊如何向上和向下流向至各MAC子層。大體而言,層管理 員3 80可使用來自實體層24〇的任何類型反饋28〇來執行各 項子層功能’實體層管理員386介接實體層240。層管理員 中的任何功能(實例包括許可控制功能384和Q〇S管理員 382)。接著,彼等功能可互動於上文所述的任何子層功能。 可配合支援多重傳輸格式的任何實體層規格來部署本文 中所說明的原理。例如,許多實體層格式允許多重傳輸率。 可按可用的功能、頻道干擾、可支援的調變格式及類似項 來決定任何既定實體鏈路的輸送量。示範性系統包括可採 用ΜΙΜΟ技術的0FDM系統及cDMA系統。在彼等系統中, 會使用封閉迴路技術來決定傳輸率及格式。封閉迴路可採 用各種訊息或訊號來指示頻道度量、可支援傳輸率的等 等。熟悉此項技術者很容易調整這些和其他系統來部署本 96870.doc -44 - 200525375 文中說明的技術。 調節層3丨0中可使用實體層反饋。例如,可在分割和重 組、資料流分類及多點播送映射中使用傳輸率資訊。圖Μ 繪示併入實體層反饋至調節層功能中之示範#方法勝 此方法係就存取點而言+以描述,但是可用類似方式配合 使用者終端機應用此方法。程序從步驟141〇開始,於此= 驟接收要傳輸至使用者終端機的資料流封包。在步驟 1420’響應各別使用者終端機的實體層反饋而執行調節層 功能。為了進-步解說此態樣,下文會詳細說明示範性多 點播送映射和分割具體實施例。在步驟144〇,監視一或多 個使用者終端機的實體層反饋。程序回到步驟1410開始, 針對額外接收到的資料流封包來重複程序,以回應已更新 之實體層反饋。 。在項替代具體實施例中,在進行許可控制決策過程中 可使用其他實體層反饋的傳輸率資訊。例如,高Q〇s資料流 =被給予許可,除非目標MAC ID實體層能夠支援充分高效 ;、々、的傳輪率。可依據系統負載(包括,現有資料流的標 稱配置、P #皿 主冊之UT數量及類似項)來調整此等級。例如, 一具有相對;^ 〇併 一 τ阿扣貝鏈路的UT被配置到高QoS資料流的可能 性兩於一彳目Μ + 關^於較低品質鏈路的MAC ID。如果系統處於 少量負載下0士 4 ’則可降低臨限值需求。 調節層多點播送 圖1 5 %示勃上 研订调節層多點播送之示範性方法丨5〇〇。調節 層多點播送B 士、 疋万法1400的一項實例,用於併入實體層反饋 96870.doc -45 - 200525375 至調節層功能。如上文所述,一種多點播送傳輸、MAC層 多點播送方法提供一相對應於一使用者終端機清單的共同 MAC ID ’該共同或多點播送MAC ID區分於使用者終端機 MAC ID。因此,當一 UT被指派給一或多個多點播送群組 時,該UT將監視CCH是否有不僅被導向至所屬MAC ID而且FIG. 10 illustrates an exemplary method 1000 for a UT to perform initial access and registration. In step 1010, the UT obtains the preamble from the frequency on the BCH to obtain the frequency and timing. In step 1020, the UT receives system identification information from the RLC broadcast message. In step 1030, the UT uses long bursts from the BCH to determine the RCH configuration for (non-time slotted) random access. In step 1040, the UT randomly selects a MAC ID from the set of starting MAC IDs. In step 1050, the UT transmits a long random access burst on the RCH using the starting MAC ID. In step 1060, the UT receives an acknowledgement, a MAC ID 96870.doc -40- 200525375 assignment in a subsequent MAC frame, and a timing adjustment. In step 1070, the association control function and the Ap association control function complete the authentication and key exchange sequence. Control message transmission on the forward and reverse links follows the low-level message transmission procedures previously described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9. FIG. 11 illustrates an exemplary method 110 for an AP to perform initial access and registration. In step mo, the AP receives a long random access burst from υτ on the RCH. At step 112, the AP assigns a MAC ID to the vτ. The MAC ID pool is managed by the radio link control function. At step 113, Aρ assigns a timing adjustment to the UT. In step 1140, the AP transmits acknowledgement, MAC ID, and timing adjustment on the CCH. In step 1150, the AP associates the control function with 1;] [The association control function completes the authentication and key exchange sequence. Control message transmission on the forward link and reverse key path follows the low-level message transmission procedure previously described with reference to Figs. 6-9. FIG. 12 illustrates an exemplary method 120 for AP user data flow. In step 1210, the QOS administrator in the layer administrator fills the data flow classification parameters into the data flow classification function. A specific combination of parameters and values can indicate the arrival of a new data stream. Their parameters can include: IP DiffServ 〇〇 Center Point (DSCP), IP source address or IP port. Ethernet parameters can include: 802. IQ VLAN ID or 802.1 Ip priority order indication. The specific port value may indicate a control protocol message (for example, Rsvp or RTCP) to be forwarded to the QoS manager. In step 1215, the AP decides the admission parameters. When a packet arrives at the 8-1 > adjustment layer and is judged as a new data stream by the data stream classification, the data stream classification will cooperate with the administrator to determine the licensing parameters, including the need to configure 96670.doc -41-200525375 for the data stream. QoS category (high QoS or best work), LL mode and nominal transmission rate. In decision step 1220, the admission control in the tier administrator decides whether or not the data stream can be admitted based on their admission parameters. If not allowed, the program stops. Otherwise, proceed to step 1225. At step 1225, the data stream classification requires the LLC to build a new data stream. In this discussion, the case of high QoS, LL Mode 3 connection will be considered. At step 1230, the LLC located at the AP communicates with the LLC located at the UT to establish a connection (or, if an applicable connection already exists, a new stream ID is established). In this example, their LLC will attempt to establish an LL Mode 3 connection (or, if an applicable LL Mode 3 connection already exists, create a new data stream ID). At step 1235, the nominal transmission rate configured for the data stream is communicated to the scheduler. For LL mode 3, the nominal transmission rate is configured on the forward and reverse channels. In step 1240, the data stream is classified: classifying the packets of the data stream; identifying the MAC ID, LL mode, and data stream ID; implementing the data stream principle; and transmitting the conformed packets to the SAR function. At step 1245, the SAR splits the packet into fragments, and forwards the adjustment layer PDU along with the LL mode and data stream ID to the LL function of the MAC ID. At step 1250, the LL function appends the LL header and CRC, and places the LL PDU into the appropriate queue. In this example, the LL mode 3 function adds an LL header and a CRC, and places the LLPDU into the high QoS queue of the MUX. In step 1255, the MUX prepares the MUX PDU by attaching a MUX header for identifying the LL pattern and length. The MUX establishes a MUX indicator to indicate the number of bytes to the beginning of the first new MUX PDU. 96870.doc • 42- 200525375 In step 1260, the scheduler decides the F-TCH (physical layer burst) configured for the MAC ID. The scheduler knows the transmission mode (from RRC) and the transmission rate (from the UT proxy). Note that a reverse link configuration can also be included. In step 1265, the configuration is transmitted on the CCH. At step 1270, the MAC transmits a MAC PDU. The MAC PDU consists of the following: a MUX indicator, followed by a possible local MUX PDU at the beginning, followed by zero or more complete MUX PDUs, and finally a possible local at the end of the physical layer burst MUX PDU. FIG. 13 illustrates an exemplary method 1300 of a UT user data stream. At step 1310, the UT receives the configuration on the CCH. In step 1320, the UT receives the MAC PDU according to the configuration. At step 1330, the MUX located at the UT fetches the MUX PDU by using the MUX indicator and the length field in the MUX header, and prepares the LLPDU. In step 1340, the MUX transmits the LL PDU to the appropriate LL function (in this example, LL mode 3) according to the type field in the MUX header. At step 1350, LL mode 3 performs an ARQ receiver and calculates a CRC for each LL PDU. At step 1360, LL mode 3 located at the UT must transmit ACK / NAK to LL mode 3 ARQ located at the AP. The ACK / NAK is placed in a high QoS queue at UTMUX. Please note that other LL models may not include approval, as described above. In step 1370, the AP transmits the ACK / NAK on the R-TCH according to the configuration. As described above, the scheduler configures the R-TCH resource of the MAC ID according to the nominal configuration of the reverse link. ACK / NAK messages are transmitted in MAC PDUs on the reverse link entity layer burst from the UT. In step 13 80, the UT can transmit any other queued 96870.doc -43 · 200525375 reverse link data in the remaining configuration. Please refer to FIG. 3 again. As described above, the data stream 260 is received by the AP MAC processor 220, and the corresponding data and signal will go down through the adjustment layer 310, the data link control layer 32 and the physical layer. For transmission to the UT. The physical layer located at the UT 24 receives the MAC PDU, and the corresponding data and signal will travel upwards through the data link control layer 320 and the adjustment layer 3 1 0 of the UT MAC processor 220. The physical layer, the reorganized data stream system Levels to be passed to one or more higher levels (ie, various processing sequences including data, voice, video, etc.). For data streams originating from the UT and transmitted to the AP, a similar processing sequence occurs in reverse order. Individual layer managers 380 can be deployed in the AP and UT to control how information flows up and down to each MAC sublayer. In general, the layer manager 380 can use any type of feedback 28 from the physical layer 240 to perform various sub-layer functions. The physical layer manager 386 interfaces with the physical layer 240. Any function in the layer administrator (examples include the admission control function 384 and the QOS administrator 382). Their functions can then interact with any of the sub-layer functions described above. The principles described in this article can be deployed with any physical layer specification that supports multiple transport formats. For example, many physical layer formats allow multiple transmission rates. The throughput of any given physical link can be determined by available functions, channel interference, supported modulation formats, and the like. Exemplary systems include OFDM systems and cDMA systems that can use MIMO technology. In their systems, closed-loop technology is used to determine the transmission rate and format. The closed loop can use various messages or signals to indicate channel metrics, supported transmission rates, etc. Those skilled in the art can easily adapt these and other systems to deploy the technology described in this 96870.doc -44-200525375 article. The physical layer feedback can be used in the adjustment layer 3 丨 0. For example, transfer rate information can be used in segmentation and reassembly, stream classification, and multicast mapping. Figure M shows an example of incorporating the physical layer feedback into the adjustment layer function. #Method wins This method is described in terms of the access point +, but it can be applied in a similar manner to the user terminal to apply this method. The program starts from step 1410, where it receives data stream packets to be transmitted to the user terminal. At step 1420 ', the adjustment layer function is executed in response to the physical layer feedback of the respective user terminal. To further illustrate this aspect, the following will describe in detail exemplary multicast mapping and segmentation specific embodiments. At step 1440, the physical layer feedback of one or more user terminals is monitored. The process returns to step 1410 and repeats the process for the additionally received data stream packets in response to the updated entity layer feedback. . In an alternative embodiment, transmission rate information fed back from other entity layers may be used in the admission control decision process. For example, high Q0s data stream = permission is granted, unless the target MAC ID entity layer can support a sufficiently efficient transfer rate. This level can be adjusted based on the system load (including the nominal configuration of the existing data stream, the number of UTs in the P #Ware Master Book, and the like). For example, the possibility that a UT with a relative ^ and a τ akabe link is configured to a high QoS data stream is more than one target M + the MAC ID of a lower quality link. If the system is under a small load of 0 ± 4 ', the threshold requirement can be reduced. Multilayer Broadcasting at the Regulation Layer Figure 15 shows a sample method for multicast broadcasting at the regulation layer. 500%. An example of Multicast Broadcasting at the Regulation Layer, and Bianwan Law 1400 is used to incorporate the physical layer feedback 96870.doc -45-200525375 to the function of the Regulation Layer. As described above, a multicast transmission, MAC layer multicast method provides a common MAC ID corresponding to a user terminal list ′. The common or multicast MAC ID is distinguished from the user terminal MAC ID. Therefore, when a UT is assigned to one or more multicast groups, the UT will monitor whether the CCH is not only directed to its own MAC ID but also

還導向至該υτ所相關聯之一或多個多點播送MAC ID的傳 輸。因此,一多點播送MAC ID可能相關聯於一或多個較高 層資料流,藉此允許傳輸單一資料流至多個使用者終端機。 在凋節層多點播送中,若不執行用於由一多點播送清單 中所有使用者終端機接收的單一傳輸,則可執行一或多個 額外傳輸多點播送資料至彼等使用者終端機中之一或多個 使用者終端機。在具體實施例中,調節層多點播送進行一 要傳輸至多點播送群組中每個使用者終端機的單點播送傳 輸。在-項替代具體實施例中,調節層多點播送可使用相 關聯於多點播送群組中之子集的—或多個MAC⑴來進行 -或多個MAC層多點播送傳輸。單點播送傳輸可被導向至 未包含在彼等子群組之一中的使用者終端機。可部署前文 斤述之任何、、且σ。在步驟丨5丨〇,接收一被導向至一使用者 終端機清單的多點播送資料流。在一項具體實施例中,一 MAC ID相關聯於該使用者終端機清單。 在決朿步驟1 520,決宁姐认难从 ^ σ 决疋對於傳輸至清單中的使用者乡 機’單點播送傳輸的效率 J欢丰疋否咼於多點播送傳輸(即,$ 使用者接收一早一值齡j 4古 ^ 得輸)的效率。如果單點播送傳輸的交 南於多點播送傳輸的效率, 千則在步驟1530,在兩個或译 96870.doc -46- 200525375 以上頻道上傳輸該單點播 道可包括單點播送頻道、 合。在決策步驟1520 ,如 會使用多點播送MAC ID, 至該多點播送群組之成員 运傳輸。彼等兩個或兩個以上頻 其他多點播送頻道或兩者之組 果多點播送傳輸的效率更高,則 以單傳輸將多點播送資料廣播 一般而言,多點播送傳輸所使用的格式必須適合在多點 播运群組中的使用者終端機實體鏈路群虹之令最弱的實體 鏈路上傳輸。在某些系統中,由於仍然必須進行最低共通 为母傳輸,以便使用最低品f實體鏈路來送達至使用者終 端機’所以事實上’可從較高傳輸率及較大輸送量獲益的 較佳處境的使用者終端機不會影響系統輸送量。作是,在 其他情況下,則不會保持適用狀態。例如,考慮到在麵〇 統中使料空間處理。多點播送群組成員可能分散於涵 现區域各地’並且兩個或兩個以上成員會具有極不同的頻 道特性。考量包含兩個使用者終端機的多點播送群组之例 錄貫例。藉由配合每個使用者終端機的傳輸格式,可實 ,適用於至每個使用者終端機之單點播送傳輸的高輸送 里。但是,由於用於每個實體璉路的兩個頻道環境完全不 5 t斤以適口運用-單一多點播送訊息送達每個使用者終 :機的傳輸格式之輸送量可能低於任一單點播送頻道。當 介=多點播送頻道與單點播送頻道輪送量之間的差異足狗 大時’系統傳輸兩個多點播送資料所使用的資源會少於傳 輸又方可接收之單一訊息所使用的資源。 圖161會示決定是否使用調節層多點播送或使用說多點 96870.doc -47- 200525375 播送之示範性方法,此方法適合部署在步驟1 520中。在步 - 驟1610,接收多點播送清單中每個使用者終端機的鏈路參 _ 數。在一項具體實施例中,可使用傳輸率參數。在步驟· 1620,接收一適合傳輸至多點播送清單中之使用者終端機 - 的多點播送頻道之鏈路參數。該多點播送頻道之彼等鏈路 參數可能不同於用於多點播送群組中之使用者終端機的任 何和所有個別頻道的鏈路參數。在步驟丨63〇,比較用於在 多點播送頻道上傳輸的系統資源需求(即,單一傳輸使用多馨 點播迗MAC ID)與個別單點播送傳輸之總和的系統資源需 求可使用表低系統資源需求來決定最具效率選擇。 在一項替代具體實施例中,可修改步驟161〇,以便包括 鏈路參數MAC層多點播送頻道(包括多點播送群組使用者 終端機之子群組)。可比較多點播送和單點播送之組合與純 MAC層多點播送。熟悉此項技術者應知道本發明的這些和 其他修改案。 實體層反饋分割 籲 圖1 7緣示響應實體層反饋而執行分割之示範性方法 P00。這屬於方法1400的另一項實例,用於併入實體層反 饋至調節層功能。可在調節層310中的分割和重組功能312 中實行此項程序,以便響應層管理員380所提供的實體層反 ΑΦ 領。 在步驟1710,接收要傳輸至對應MAC⑴的資料流封包。 在步驟1720,擷取對應MAC ID的傳輸率資訊。在步驟 173〇’分割該封包成為片段以響應MAC ID傳輸率。在一項 · 96870.doc -48- 200525375 :範性具體實施例令,此分割作業會產生多個片段420,彼 等片段倒係用於產生實體子層pDU 43〇,女口前文參考圖5 之說明所述。 圖1晴示響應傳輸率而分割片段(segment㈣之示範性 方法。此方法適合部署在前段落中所說明的步驟⑺时。 程=從決策步驟1810開始。如果傳輸率已變更,則進行到 決朿步驟1820。如果傳輸率未變更,則程序停止,並且分 割大小維持不變。 在決策步驟1820,如果傳輸率變更是傳輪率增加,則可 能::相關聯於增加片段大小之增益。例如,如圖*所示, 二=在其行進協定堆集時接收各層添加項。減少片 =!減少所需的添加項量。另外,較高傳輸率通常意 明者較向品質頻道。當頻道會隨時間而急遽變更時,可能 的情況為,在苹# # 8车μ _ 恒定。傳頻道之平均值維持相對 -片段的時間量約相同於較㈣於变 丄午傳輸 旦“度 ㈣仏傳輸率之較小片段大小的時 里 此%間量成正比於-頻道傾向維持相對稃定 許增加效率,且不1 則增加片段大小可允 u有#段大小增加的貞面影響。 另一項考慮選擇一片鉛士 ,及士 更時。傳輸率變更合引…發生實體層傳輸率變It is also directed to the transmission of one or more multicast MAC IDs associated with this vτ. Therefore, a multicast MAC ID may be associated with one or more higher-level data streams, thereby allowing a single data stream to be transmitted to multiple user terminals. In withered layer multicast, if a single transmission for receiving by all user terminals in a multicast list is not performed, one or more additional transmissions of multicast data can be performed to their user terminals One or more user terminals in the machine. In a specific embodiment, the adjustment layer multicast performs a unicast transmission to be transmitted to each user terminal in the multicast group. In an alternative embodiment, the adjustment layer multicast can be performed using-or multiple MAC frames associated with a subset of the multicast group-or multiple MAC layer multicast transmissions. Unicast transmissions can be directed to user terminals that are not included in one of their subgroups. Any of the above mentioned, and σ can be deployed. In step 5-5, a multicast data stream directed to a list of user terminals is received. In a specific embodiment, a MAC ID is associated with the user terminal list. At step 1 520, Sister Ning found it difficult to determine the efficiency of the unicast transmission for users who are on the list. 欢 欢 疋 Whether it is for multicast transmission (that is, $ use The efficiency of the recipient receiving the early age value (j 4 ^^). If the unicast transmission is more efficient than the multicast transmission, then in step 1530, the transmission on two or more 96870.doc -46- 200525375 channels. The unicast channel may include unicast channels, combined . In decision step 1520, if a multicast MAC ID is used, it is transmitted to the members of the multicast group. Their two or more other multicast channels or the combination of the two are more efficient for multicast transmission. In a single transmission, the multicast data broadcast is generally used for multicast transmission. The format must be suitable for transmission on the weakest physical link of the user terminal physical link group rainbow in the multicast group. In some systems, since the lowest common transmission is still necessary for the mother to use the lowest quality physical link to reach the user terminal 'in fact,' it can actually benefit from higher transmission rates and larger throughput A better user terminal does not affect system throughput. As a result, in other cases, it will not remain applicable. For example, consider the use of material space processing in the system. The members of a multicast group may be scattered around the area of interest 'and two or more members will have very different channel characteristics. Consider the example of a multicast group containing two user terminals. By cooperating with the transmission format of each user terminal, it can be implemented, which is suitable for high-speed transmission of unicast transmission to each user terminal. However, because the environment of the two channels used for each physical channel is not 5 tons at all, it is palatable to use-a single multicast message is delivered to each user. The transmission volume of the transmission format of the machine may be lower than any one. On-demand channels. When the difference between the rotation volume of the multicast channel and the unicast channel is large enough, 'the system will use less resources to transmit two multicast data than to transmit and receive a single message. Resources. FIG. 161 shows an exemplary method for deciding whether to use the multi-layer broadcast of the adjustment layer or the multi-point broadcast 96870.doc -47- 200525375. This method is suitable for deployment in step 1 520. At step 1610, the link parameters of each user terminal in the multicast list are received. In a specific embodiment, a transmission rate parameter may be used. In step 1620, a link parameter of a multicast channel suitable for transmission to a user terminal in the multicast list is received. The link parameters of the multicast channel may differ from the link parameters of any and all individual channels for user terminals in the multicast group. In step 丨 63, comparing the system resource requirements for the transmission on the multicast channel (that is, a single transmission uses Multicast On Demand MAC ID) and the total system resource requirements of the individual unicast transmissions can use the table low system Resource requirements determine the most efficient choice. In an alternative specific embodiment, step 1610 may be modified to include the link parameter MAC layer multicast channel (including a subgroup of the multicast group user terminal). Compare the combination of multicast and unicast with pure MAC layer multicast. Those skilled in the art will be aware of these and other modifications of the invention. Physical layer feedback segmentation Figure 17 illustrates an exemplary method P00 for performing segmentation in response to physical layer feedback. This is another example of method 1400 for incorporating physical layer feedback to the adjustment layer functions. This procedure can be implemented in the split and reorganize function 312 in the adjustment layer 310 in order to respond to the physical layer provided by the layer administrator 380. In step 1710, a data stream packet to be transmitted to a corresponding MAC (R) is received. In step 1720, the transmission rate information corresponding to the MAC ID is retrieved. The packet is divided into fragments in step 1730 'in response to the MAC ID transmission rate. In a · 96870.doc -48- 200525375: a general embodiment, this segmentation operation will generate multiple segments 420, which are used to generate a solid sub-layer pDU 43〇, the female reference is shown in Figure 5 The description is described. Figure 1 shows an exemplary method of segmenting segments in response to the transmission rate. This method is suitable for deploying the steps described in the previous paragraph. Process = Start from decision step 1810. If the transmission rate has changed, go to the decision朿 Step 1820. If the transmission rate is not changed, the program stops and the segmentation size remains unchanged. At decision step 1820, if the transmission rate is changed to increase the round rate, it may be: a gain associated with increasing the fragment size. For example , As shown in Figure *, two = receive additions from each layer when it travels the stack of agreements. Reduce slices =! Reduce the amount of additions required. In addition, a higher transmission rate usually means that the channel is more quality. When the channel will When changing rapidly over time, the possible situation is that the Ping # # 8 车 μ _ is constant. The average value of the transmission channel is maintained relatively-the amount of time of the fragment is about the same as that of the transmission at "noon time". The percentage of the smaller segment size is proportional to the channel's tendency to maintain a relatively fixed increase in efficiency, and if it is not 1, increasing the segment size may allow the # segment size to increase. Another consideration to select a lead with disabilities, and persons more time. Transmission rate change occurred together lead ... physical layer transmission rate change

功能中的非#6必須M更片段大小,促使藉由MUX 力月匕中的非先佔式優先順 自PM、 、 Α取短延遲條件約束需求 至圖2予;1服務延遲條件約束,下文會參考㈣ 芏圆于以坪細說明。 96870.doc -49- 200525375 在本發明的範嘴内可併入各種用於選擇片段大小的技 術。請4新參考圖18,在此^範性具體實施例中,在決策 V驟1820中’當發生傳輸率變更時,會進行至步驟工㈣以 增加調節子層PDU大小。在決策步驟182〇,如果傳輸率變 更是傳輸率降低,則進行至步驟184〇,在此步驟會按照前 段落所論述的任何技術來減小調節子層pDU大小。 圖18所示之方法主要係用於解說一種可行機制,用於使 用介於實體層傳輸率與分割片段大小之間的關係來進行分 割。在一項替代具體實施例中,可產生一片段大小表,每 個片段大小相關聯於一傳輸率或傳輸率範圍。在另一項具 體貫%例中,可部署一項函數,該函數的一運算元傳輸率, 並且為函數的輸出會產出一片段大小表。按照本文講授内 谷,熟悉此項技術者應明白有許其他可行方案。請注意, 如前段落說明所述,分割可結合多點播送映射技術(如前文 芩考圖14至圖16說明所述),以及響應實體層反饋而執行的 任何其他調節層功能。 多工處理 在示範性咼效率無線LAN子網路(例如,無線網路120) 中,介於AP 104與一或多個UT 106之間的會發生所有的通 信。如上文所述,這些通信的性質可能是單點播送或多點 播送。在單點播送通信中,使用者資料或控制資料係從Ap 傳送至單一 UT,或從UT傳送至AP。每個UT各具有一唯一 MAC ID,所以介於UT與AP之間的所有單點播送通信係相 關聯於該唯一 MAC ID。在多點播送通信中,使用者資料或 96870.doc -50- 200525375 控制資料係從AP傳輸至多個^^。會設置一 MAC m集區來 當做多點播送位址。可能有定義相關聯於一存取點的一或 多個多點播送群組,並且每個群組各被指派一唯一多點播 迗MAC ID。每個UT可能屬於彼等多點播送群組中之一或多 個群組(或不屬於任一群組),並且將會接收相關聯於其所屬 之每個多點播送群組的傳輸。基於多工處理論述之目的, 調節層多點播送被視為單點播送。在此實例中,υτ不傳輸 多點播送資料。 一存取點接收來自外部網路(即,網路丨〇2)之定址至所屬 涵蓋區域内之UT的使用者資料,而且接收來自所屬涵蓋區 域内UT之被導向至其他裝置(可能是所屬涵蓋區域内的 UT,或透過網路附接的υτ)的使用者資料。一存取點還可 從無線電鏈路控制(RLC)功能340、邏輯鏈路控制(LLC)功能 330以及其他實體,來產生預定給其涵蓋區域内的個別或多 個UT。可依據Q〇s考量或其他考量(例如,來源應用),將定 址給單一 UT的使用者資料隔離成數個資料流,如上文所 述。 如上文所述,最後,存取點將來自所有來源之預定給單 MAC ID的所有資料茱總成為一單一位元組資料流,接著 該位元組資料流被格式化成數個MAC pDU,每個MAC pDU 都是在一單一 MAC訊框中予以傳輸。存取點可在單一 MAc 訊框中傳送一或多個MAC ID的MAC PDU(即,在正向鏈路 上)。 同樣地,UT可具有要傳送之可被隔離成數個資料流的使 96870.doc -51 - 200525375 用者資料。UT還可產生相關聯於RLC 340、LLC 330或其他 實體的控制資訊。UT彙總使用者資料和控制資料成為一位 元組資料流,接著該位元組資料流被格式化成數個MAC PDU,每個MAC PDU都是在一單一 MAC訊框中傳送至AP。 一或多個UT可在單一 MAC訊框中傳送一 MAC PDU(即,在 反向鏈路上)。 在AP處按MAC ID來實行MUX功能360。每個UT最初都被 指派一用於單點播送傳輸的MAC ID。如果UT屬於一或多個 多點播送群組,則可指派額外MAC ID。MUX功能准許(a) 將配置給一 MAC ID的連續實體層叢發配置視為一位元組 資料流;以及(b)將來自一或多個LL或RLC實體的PDU多工 處理成為MAC的位元組資料流。 圖19繪示在單一MAC訊框中傳輸多資料流及命令之示範 性方法1 900。此方法適合部署在存取點或使用者終端機 中。程序從決策步驟1910開始。如果接收到預定給一MAC ID的一或多個資料流中的一或多個封包,則進行到步驟 1920,在此步驟針對各自一或多個資料流來準備相關聯於 該MAC ID的MUX PDU。在此示範性具體實施例中,MUX PDU係按照上文所述之MAC協定予以準備,但是在本發明 範圍内可部署替代的MAC協定。MUX PDU可被置入適當的 佇列中(在示範性具體實施例中,高QoS佇列或最佳工作佇 列)。如果在步驟1910中未接收到MAC ID的資料流,則在 步驟1920中已準備MUX PDU後,進行到決策步驟193 0。 在決策步驟1930,如果來自RLC 340或LLC 330的一或多 96870.doc -52- 200525375 個命令係要傳輸至相關聯於該MAC ID的UT,則進行到步驟 1940並且準備每個命令PDU的一 MUX PDU。如果沒有預定 給MAC ID的命令,或已在步驟1940中準備好MUX PDU後, 則進行到決策步驟1950。 決策步驟1950解說用於持續監視預定給一MAC ID之資 料流的反覆型處理序。替代具體實施例可在整個存取點或 使用者終端機處理序的任何其他部中置入迴圈功能。在一 項替代具體實施例中,程序1900反覆重複,或被包含在其 他反覆型處理序中。僅基於例證目的,就單一MAC ID來說 明此項處理序。顯而易見,在存取點中,可同時處理多個 MAC ID。熟悉此項技術者應明白本發明的這些和其他修改 案。 當沒有任何準備好要處理的命令或資料流時,在此實例 中,處理序迴圈會回到決策步驟1 910以重複迴圈。請注意, 在使用者終端機中,必須向存取點提出用以起始一 MAC訊 框配置的要求,如上文所述。可部署任何此類技術。圖19 中未包含細節。顯然地,如果沒有正等待傳輸的命令或資 料流,則不需要提出要求,因此沒有任何MAC訊框配置會 抵達。當一命令或資料流正等待傳輸時,則排程器會隨時 進行一 MAC訊框配置,如上文所述。在此示範性具體實施 例中,一存取點排程器376會進行正向鏈路MAC訊框配置以 響應UT特有的MUX功能360中的MAC ID佇列,並且會進行 反向鏈路MAC訊框配置以響應有關RCH或UT代理伺服器 (proxy)仔列之要求,如上文所述。無論如何,執行方法1 900 96870.doc -53- 200525375 的通信裝置會在決策步驟1950等待一 MAC訊框配置。 當在決策步驟1950中進行一 MAC訊框配置時,則會在步 驟1960中將一或多個MUX PDU置入一單一MAC PDU中。該 MAC PDU可包含從前一 MAC訊框剩餘的局部MUX PDU 464、一來自一或多個資料流的MUX PDU、一或多個命令 MUX PDU或彼等項之任何組合。如果任何已配置空間仍是 未被使用,則可以將一局部MUX PDU插入該MAC訊框中 (或可以插入任何類型填補項(padding),以便填滿該已配置 之MAC訊框)。 在步驟1970,會在該配置所指示的位置處,在實體鏈路 上傳輸MAC PDU。請注意,MAC PDU可包括來自一或多個 資料流或命令PDU之任何組合的MUX PDU。 如上文所述,在此示範性具體實施例中,在F-TCH或 R-TCH上,MAC PDU是適合指派給一 MAC ID之實體層叢發 的傳輸單位。圖20繪示示範性案例。一 MAC PDU 460係由 下列項目所組成:一 MUX指標462、接著是一位於起始處之 可能的局部MUX PDU 464、接著是零或多個完整MUX PDU 466以及最後是一位於實體層叢發尾端的一可能的局部 MUX PDU 468。請注意,圖中繪示兩個連續MAC訊框460A 和460B之各自部分。在訊框f期間所傳輸之MAC訊框460 A 的子部分係以附加的「A」予以識別。在訊框f+1期間所傳 輸之MAC訊框460B的子部分係以附加的「B」予以識別。 當多個MUX PDU被串連在一 MAC PDU内時,則可以在該 MAC PDU之尾端來傳輸一局部MUX PDU,在此情況下,會 96870.doc -54- 200525375 在下一 MAC訊框中傳送之MAC PDU的開頭部分傳輸該 MUX PDU的餘項。圖20中藉由在MAC訊框460A中所傳輸的 局部MUX PDU 468A予以圖解說明。會在下一 MAC訊框 460B期間傳輸該MUXPDU 464B的餘項。 MAC標頭係由MUX指標2020及可能有相關聯於MAC PDU的MAC ID 20 10所組成。當正在使用空間多工時,則可 能會需要MAC ID,並且可能會有同時傳輸的一個以上MAC PDU。熟悉此項技術者應知道何時應部署MAC ID 2010,圖 中用陰影繪示以表示這些選用項。 在此示範性具體實施例中,部署每MAC PDU—個2位元 組MUX指標2020,以便識別在MAC訊框中傳輸之任何MUX PDU的位置(如圖20中從MUX指標2020至MUX PDU 466A的 箭頭所示)。每MAC PDU都會使用MUX指標2020。MUX指 標指向MAC PDU内第一個MUX PDU的起始處。MUX指標 連同每個MUX PDU中所包含之長度欄位一起允許接收方 MUX層從位元組資料流(由配置至該MAC ID的連續實體層 叢發所組成)擷取LL及PLC PDU。熟悉此項技術者應明白, 屬於本發明範疇内之用於部署指標的各種替代手段。例 如,從上文所述的實例,可按替代順序來封裝MAC訊框。 一餘項局部MUXPDU可被置放在MAC訊框配置的尾端,並 且指標係指向該餘項的起始處,而不是指向新的MUX PDU。因此,新的PDU(若有的話)被置放在開頭部分。可部 署數種指標技術(即,一用於識別一位元組的索引值、一時 間值、一基數值加一位移或熟悉此項技術者所知的任何許 96870.doc -55- 200525375 多變化方案)。 在此示範性具體實施例中,MUX指標2020包括一單一 16 位元欄位,該欄位的值是1加上始於訊框開始之第一個MUX PDU開頭部分之該MUX指標之尾端的位移(以位元組為單 位)。如果值為0,則沒有開始訊框的MUX PDU。如果值為1, 則MUX PDU會立即接在該MUX指標後開始。如果值為 η>1,則MAC PDU中的前η-1個位元組是一在前一訊框開始 之MUX PDU的尾端。此項資訊有助於接收器MUX(即,MUX 功能360)從導致同步於MUX PDU邊界損失之先前訊框錯誤 復原。熟悉此項技術者應明白,可部署任可數量之替代索 引技術。 包含一類型(邏輯頻道)攔位及一長度攔位的MUX標頭被 附加至提供給MUX的所有LL或RLC PDU。該類型(邏輯頻 道)欄位識別PDU所屬的LL或RLC實體。如同前段落說明所 述,長度欄位係連同MUX指標一起使用,以便允許接收方 MUX層從位元組資料流(由配置至該MAC ID的連續實體層 叢發所組成)擷取LL及PLC PDU。 如上文所述,MUX功能360維護用於要傳輸之資料的三個 佇列。高QoS佇列362可包含相關聯於一已協商之服務的LL PDU,該許可控制功能384已配置該已協商之服務的保證傳 輸率。最佳工作佇列364可包含相關聯於一傳輸率保證的LL PDU。控制訊息佇列366可包含RLC和LLC PDU。 替代具體實施例可包含一個以上Q〇S彳宁列。但是,如本 文所述,高效率運用高傳輸率WLAN允許一單一 QoS佇列來 96870.doc -56- 200525375 達成極佳的QoS效能。在許情況下,藉由MAC協定來高效 率運用可用的頻道頻寬會提供不必要的額外佇列及相關聯 的複雜度。 在AP處,會促使每個佇列中的積存(backlog)可供共同 MAC功能370中的排程器376使用。在AP處會在MUX功能 360的UT代理伺服器(pr〇xy)中維護位於υτ處之彼等佇列中 的積存(backlog)。請注意,基於簡明清楚,圖3中未獨立繪 示彼等11丁代理伺服器(1)1^7)佇列。佇列362、364及366可 被視為包含每個MAC ID的正向鏈路佇列和反向鏈路佇列 (即,UT代理伺服器(pr〇xy)佇列),無論共用fw或分離的組 件中是否有部署彼等佇列。請注意,所支援的正向鏈路佇 列和反向鏈路佇列之數量和類型不需要完全相同。UT代理 伺服器(proxy)佇列不需要完全相符於UT佇列。例如,UT 可維護一命令佇列,以便給予某些易受時間影響之命令優 先於其他南(^〇8 PDU的優先順序。在AP處,可使用单一向 QoS來指示對兩種類型UT流量的要求。因此,可使用在UT 處所決定的優先順序來填補對UT的配置。舉另一實例而 言,可在UT或AP處分別維護不同的QoS佇列,而且在AP或 UT處不會維護對方的Q〇S佇列。 排程器376仲裁來自所有MAC ID的競爭需求,並且在 F-TCH或R-TCH上配置一實體層叢發至一或多個所選MAC ID。響應一項配置,對應之MUX功能36〇封裝乙乙和RLCpDU 成為MAC PDU封包承載’如上文所述。在此示範性具體實 施例令’每個MUX功能360都會按下列非先佔式優先順序來 96870.doc -57- 200525375 (徹底)伺服來自下列佇列的PDU :控制訊息佇列366、高QoS 佇列362及最佳工作佇列364。在伺服來自較高優先順序佇 列的新PDU之前,會先完成來自先前MAC PDU的任何局部 PDU(即使局部PDU係來自較低優先順序佇列)。在替代具體 實施例中,可在一或多個層級處部署先佔式優先順序,如 熟悉此項技術者所知。 在接收器處,MUX功能從由連續MAC PDU所組成的位元 組流來擷取PDU,並且將其投送至所屬的LL或RLC實體。 路徑選擇係以MUX PDU標頭中所包含的類型欄位(邏輯頻 道)為基礎。 在此示範性具體實施例中,按照MUX功能之設計,一旦 已開始傳輸MUX PDU,就會先完成此項傳輸,之後才能開 始另一 MUX PDU。因此,如果在一 MAC訊框中開始傳輸一 來自最佳工作佇列的MUX PDU,則會先在一後續MAC訊框 (或多訊框)中完成此項傳輸,之後才會傳輸來自控制訊息佇 列或高QoS佇列的其他MUX PDU。換言之,在正常運作中, 較高類別佇列具有非先佔式優先順序。 在替代具體實施例中,或在此示範性具體實施例中在某 些情況下,可能會想要用先佔式優先順序。例如,如果實 體層資料傳輸率已變更,則可能需要緊急傳輸一控制訊 息,這需要優先於最佳工作或高QoS MUXPDU的傳輸先佔 式優先順序。這是被准許的做法。接收方MUX會偵測並丟 棄未完全傳輸的MUX PDU,下文中會進一步詳細說明。 先佔式事件(即,實體層傳輸率變更)也可引發需要變更 96870.doc -58- 200525375 该υτ所使用的片段大小。可選用υτ所使用的片段大小,促 使藉由MUX功能中的非先佔式優先順序來滿足最短延遲條 件約束或控制訊息佇列的服務延遲條件約束。這些技術可 結合上文參考圖17至圖18所說明的分割技術。 圖21繪示使用MUX指標來準備MAC訊框之示範性方法 2100此方法可被部署在AP或UT中。按照本文講授内容, 熟悉此項技術者很容易調整此例證性實例以配合許多具體 實施例(AP或UT)。程序從步驟211〇開始,在此步驟接收用 於一 MAC PDU的配置。 在決策步驟2120,如果來自前一MAC訊框的局部Μυχ PDU仍然存在,則進行到決策步驟213〇。如果沒有局部Μυχ PDU存在,則進行到步驟215〇。 在決策步驟2130,如果想要用先佔式優先順序,則不會 傳輸該局部MUXPDU。程序進行到步驟215〇。在此示範性 具體實施例中,在某些情況下可使用先佔式優先順序,以 便傳送一易受時間影響之命令Μυχρ〇υ。前文已詳述先佔 式優先順序之其他實例。當希望放棄傳輸Μυχ pDu之餘項 時,就可使用任何先佔式條件。MAC訊框的接收器可直接 丢棄該MUXPDU的前部分。下文詳細說明示範性接收器功 能H替代具體實施例中,可定義先佔式優先順序, 以便允許在以後的時間傳輸已具先佔式優先順序的Μυχ PDU。替代具體實施例可部署任何數量之先佔式優先順序 規格,以便在決策步驟2130中使用。如果不想先佔式優先 順序,則進行到步驟2 140。 96870.doc -59- 200525375 在步驟2140,先將該局部MUX PDU置放在MAC PDU中。 如果配置小於該局部MUX PDU,則可以使用所想要的MUX PDU數量來填補該配置,並且可儲存餘項,以便在後續MAC 訊框配置中傳輸。 在步驟2150,可將任何新的MUX PDU置放在MAC PDU 中。MUX功能可決定置放來自任何可用佇列之MUX PDU的 優先順序。前文已說明示範性優先順序機制,然而可部署 任何優先順序機制。 在步驟2160,將MUX指標設定為第一個新MUXPDU的位 置。在此示範性具體實施例中,0值MUX指標意謂著配置中 不包含任何MUX PDU。1值MUX指標意謂著接在MUX標頭 後的第一個位元組是下一個新MUX PDU的起始處(即,在 MAC PDU的開頭部分沒有任何局部MUX PDU)。其他MUX 指標值指示介於一餘項局部MUX PDU與任何新MUX PDU 起始處之間的適當邊界。在替代具體實施例中,可定義其 他特殊MUX指標值,或可部署指標值指標機制。 在步驟2170,如果已配置之MAC PDU中仍然有空間,則 一局部MUX PDU可被置放在剩餘空間中。或者,任何類類 填補項可被插入在剩餘空間中。可儲存一局部置放之MUX PDU的餘項,以便在後續訊框配置中傳輸。 圖22繪示接收包含MUX指標之MAC訊框之示範性方法 2200。此方法可被部署在AP或UT中。按照本文講授内容, 熟悉此項技術者很容易調整此例證性實例以配合許多具體 實施例(AP或UT)。 96870.doc -60- 200525375 程序從步驟22 10開始,在此步驟接收一 MAC PDU。在步 驟2215,從該MAC PDU擷取MUX指標。在決策步驟2220, 如果MUX指標大於1,則進行到步驟2225。在此示範性具體 實施例中,如果MUX指標是0或1,則在MAC訊框的開頭部 分沒有任何局部MUX PDU。0值MUX指標指示沒有任何 MUX PDU。在任一情況下,進行到決策步驟2230。 在決策步驟2230,如果有儲存一來自前一 MAC訊框的局 部MUX PDU,則進行到步驟2235並且丟棄該儲存之前一訊 框。在此實例中,已優先處理該儲存之訊框的餘項。替代 具體實施例可允許隨後傳輸該儲存之訊框的餘項,在此情 況下,可儲存先前的局部MUX PDU(例證性示範性方法2200 中未詳細繪示細節)。在決策步驟2230,如果沒有儲存任何 局部MUX PDU,或要後續處理該儲存之先前局部MUX PDU,貝J進行到步驟2240。 在步驟2240,在MUX指標所指示之位置處的開頭部分擷 取新的MUX PDU。請注意,在此示範性具體實施例中,0 值MUX指標意謂著MAC PDU中沒有任何新的MUX PDU。 可擷取任何新的MUX PDU,包括一新的局部MUX PDU。如 上文所述,可使用MUX PDU標頭中的長度欄位來定義MUX PDU的邊界。 在決策步驟2245,如果MAC PDU中包括一局部MUX PDU,則進行到步驟2250以儲存該局部MUX PDU。可將該 儲存之局部MUX PDU結合來自一未來MAC PDU中的餘項 (除非以後決定應丟棄該局部MUX PDU,如上文所述)。在 96870.doc -61 - 200525375 決策步驟2245,如果MAC PDU中不包括任何新的局部MUX PDU,或如果已在步驟2250中儲存該局部MUX PDU,則進 行到步驟2255。 在步驟2255,可傳遞任何完整的MUXPDU,以便在協定 堆集中進一步處理,包括重組(若適當),如上文所述。 如上文所述,MUX功能允許多工處理MAC訊框上定義之 流量頻道片段内的邏輯頻道(F-TCH及R-TCH)。在此示範性 具體實施例中,MUX功能所多工處理的邏輯頻道係藉由 MUX標頭中的4位元訊息類塑欄位予以識別,表格1詳細此 項實例。 表格1 :邏輯頻道類型欄位 邏輯頻道 MUX類型欄位(十六進位) UDCH0 0x0 UDCH1 0x1 UDCH2 0x2 UDCH3 0x3 RBCH 0x4 DCCH 0x5 LCCH 0x6 UBCH 0x7 UMCH 0x8 圖23繪示表格1所列出之數種MUX類型的示範性MUX PDU。可使用使用者資料頻道PDU(UDCH0 2310、UDCH1 2320、UDCH2 2330、UDCH3 2340)來傳輸及接收使用者資 料。可按照如前文參考圖4之說明所述來形成PDU。每個 PDU各包括一含類型和長度攔位的MUX標頭。接在該MUX 標頭後的項目是·· LL標頭、,1位元組AL標頭、至多4087 個位元組資料及一 3位元組CRC。對於UDCH0 2310,LL標 96870.doc -62- 200525375 頭是1個位元組。對於UDCHl 2320,LL標頭是2個位元組。 對於UDCH2 2330,LL標頭是3個位元組。對於UDCH3 2340,LL標頭是4個位元組。前文已詳述用於處理彼等LL PDU類型的邏輯層功能。 圖23中還繪示各種控制訊息PDU 2350-2370。每個PDU各 包括一含一類型攔位、一保留欄位和一長度欄位的MUX標 頭。接在該MUX標頭後的項目是可變長度的資料欄位,此 資料欄位可能是介於4與255個位元組之間,並且包括RLC 訊息封包承載。圖23中繪示無線電鏈路廣播頻道(Radio Link Broadcast Channel ; RBCH)PDU 2350、專用控制頻道 (Dedicated Control Channel PDU ; DCCH)PDU 2360以及邏 輯鏈路控制頻道(Logical Link Control Channel ; LLCH)PDU 2370。使用者廣播頻道(User Broadcast Channel; UBCH)PDU 及使用者多點播送頻道(User Multicast Channel ; UMCH)PDU的格式完全相同於UDCH0 PDU 2310。UBCH的 類型欄位被設定為0111。UMCH的類型攔位被設定為1000。 熟悉此項技術者應明白彼等PDU僅作為例證用途。還可 以支援各種額外PDU以及所繪示之PDU的子集。在替代具 體實施例中,所繪示之每項欄位可具有替代寬度。其他PDU 也包含額外攔位。 示範性無線電鏈路控制(RLC) 前文已說明無線電鏈路控制340,並且會在此段落中進一 步詳細示範性具體實施例。表格2提出一組示範性RLC訊 息。所描述之示範性訊息僅僅是示範,在各項替代具體實 96870.doc -63- 200525375 施例中可部署彼等訊息之子集以及額外訊息。每項訊息中 的欄位大小及類型也是示範性。按照本文講授内容,熟悉 此項技術者很容易調整敘多替代訊息格式。 表格2 : RLC訊息類型The non- # 6 in the function must be more fragment size, and the non-preemptive priority in the MUX force moon is used to preferentially take the short delay conditions from PM,, and A to constrain the demand to Figure 2; 1 service delay condition constraints, below Will refer to ㈣ 芏 circle Yu Yiping detailed description. 96870.doc -49- 200525375 Various techniques for selecting fragment sizes can be incorporated into the scope of the present invention. Please refer to FIG. 18 for a new reference. In this exemplary embodiment, in decision step 1820, when a transmission rate change occurs, it will proceed to the step to increase the adjustment sub-layer PDU size. In decision step 1820, if the transmission rate changes but the transmission rate decreases, then proceed to step 1840, in which the pDU size of the adjustment sublayer is reduced according to any of the techniques discussed in the previous paragraph. The method shown in Figure 18 is mainly used to explain a feasible mechanism for dividing using the relationship between the transmission rate of the physical layer and the size of the segment. In an alternative embodiment, a fragment size table may be generated, each fragment size being associated with a transmission rate or a range of transmission rates. In another specific example, a function may be deployed, an operand transfer rate of the function, and a fragment size table may be generated for the output of the function. According to the teaching in this article, those familiar with this technology should understand that there are other feasible solutions. Note that as described in the previous paragraph, segmentation can be combined with multicast mapping techniques (as described above with reference to Figures 14 to 16), and any other adjustment layer functions performed in response to physical layer feedback. Multiplexing In an exemplary high-efficiency wireless LAN subnet (eg, wireless network 120), all communication between the AP 104 and one or more UTs 106 occurs. As mentioned above, the nature of these communications may be unicast or multicast. In unicast communication, user data or control data is transmitted from Ap to a single UT, or from UT to AP. Each UT has a unique MAC ID, so all unicast communication systems between the UT and the AP are associated with the unique MAC ID. In multicast communication, user data or 96870.doc -50- 200525375 control data is transmitted from the AP to multiple ^^. A MAC m pool will be set up as a multicast address. There may be one or more multicast groups defined that are associated with an access point, and each group is assigned a unique multicast MAC ID. Each UT may belong to one or more of its multicast groups (or not to any group) and will receive transmissions associated with each multicast group to which it belongs. For the purpose of the multiplexing discussion, multicast at the regulatory layer is considered unicast. In this example, υτ does not transmit multicast data. An access point receives user data addressed from an external network (ie, network 〇 02) to a UT in its own coverage area, and receives user data from the UT in its own coverage area that is directed to other devices Cover user data for UTs in the area, or υτ) attached via the network. An access point may also generate, from the radio link control (RLC) function 340, the logical link control (LLC) function 330, and other entities, individual or multiple UTs intended for its coverage area. User data addressed to a single UT can be isolated into multiple data streams based on QOS considerations or other considerations (for example, source applications), as described above. As described above, in the end, the access point aggregates all data from all sources that are scheduled for a single MAC ID into a single byte data stream, and then the byte data stream is formatted into several MAC pDUs, each MAC pDUs are transmitted in a single MAC frame. The access point can transmit MAC PDUs (ie, on the forward link) with one or more MAC IDs in a single MAc frame. Likewise, the UT may have user data to be transmitted that can be isolated into several data streams. 96870.doc -51-200525375 The UT may also generate control information associated with RLC 340, LLC 330, or other entities. The UT aggregates user data and control data into a single byte data stream, and then the byte data stream is formatted into several MAC PDUs, and each MAC PDU is transmitted to the AP in a single MAC frame. One or more UTs can transmit a MAC PDU (i.e., on the reverse link) in a single MAC frame. The MUX function 360 is implemented by the MAC ID at the AP. Each UT is initially assigned a MAC ID for unicast transmissions. If the UT belongs to one or more multicast groups, an additional MAC ID may be assigned. The MUX function allows (a) to treat a continuous entity layer burst configuration allocated to a MAC ID as a one-tuple data stream; and (b) to multiplex PDUs from one or more LL or RLC entities into MAC Byte data stream. FIG. 19 illustrates an exemplary method 1900 of transmitting multiple data streams and commands in a single MAC frame. This method is suitable for deployment in access points or user terminals. The program starts with decision step 1910. If one or more packets in one or more data streams destined for a MAC ID are received, proceed to step 1920, in which a MUX associated with the MAC ID is prepared for each of the one or more data streams. PDU. In this exemplary embodiment, the MUX PDU is prepared in accordance with the MAC protocol described above, but alternative MAC protocols may be deployed within the scope of the present invention. The MUX PDU may be placed in a suitable queue (in an exemplary embodiment, a high QoS queue or an optimal working queue). If the MAC ID data stream is not received in step 1910, after the MUX PDU has been prepared in step 1920, it proceeds to decision step 1930. In decision step 1930, if one or more 96870.doc -52- 200525375 commands from RLC 340 or LLC 330 are to be transmitted to the UT associated with the MAC ID, proceed to step 1940 and prepare each command PDU. One MUX PDU. If there is no order for the MAC ID, or after the MUX PDU has been prepared in step 1940, then proceed to decision step 1950. The decision step 1950 illustrates an iterative process sequence for continuously monitoring a data stream destined for a MAC ID. Alternate embodiments may incorporate a loop function throughout the access point or any other part of the user terminal process. In an alternative embodiment, the process 1900 is repeated iteratively, or included in other iterative processing sequences. For illustration purposes only, this processing sequence is described in terms of a single MAC ID. Obviously, multiple MAC IDs can be processed simultaneously in an access point. Those skilled in the art will appreciate these and other modifications of the invention. When there is no command or data stream ready to be processed, in this example, the processing sequence loop goes back to decision step 1 910 to repeat the loop. Please note that in the user terminal, the access point must be requested to initiate a MAC frame configuration, as described above. Any such technology can be deployed. Details are not included in Figure 19. Obviously, if there is no command or data stream waiting to be transmitted, no request is required, so no MAC frame configuration will arrive. When a command or data stream is waiting for transmission, the scheduler will configure a MAC frame at any time, as described above. In this exemplary embodiment, an access point scheduler 376 performs forward link MAC frame configuration in response to the MAC ID queue in the UX-specific MUX function 360, and performs reverse link MAC. The frame is configured in response to a request for an RCH or UT proxy queue, as described above. In any case, the communication device executing method 1 900 96870.doc -53- 200525375 waits for a MAC frame configuration in decision step 1950. When a MAC frame configuration is performed in decision step 1950, one or more MUX PDUs are placed in a single MAC PDU in step 1960. The MAC PDU may include the local MUX PDU 464 remaining from the previous MAC frame, a MUX PDU from one or more data streams, one or more command MUX PDUs, or any combination thereof. If any allocated space is still unused, a local MUX PDU can be inserted into the MAC frame (or any type of padding can be inserted to fill the allocated MAC frame). At step 1970, the MAC PDU is transmitted on the physical link at the location indicated by the configuration. Please note that a MAC PDU may include a MUX PDU from any combination of one or more data streams or command PDUs. As described above, in this exemplary embodiment, on the F-TCH or R-TCH, the MAC PDU is a transmission unit that is suitable for being assigned to a physical layer of a MAC ID. FIG. 20 illustrates an exemplary case. A MAC PDU 460 consists of the following items: a MUX indicator 462, followed by a possible local MUX PDU 464 at the beginning, followed by zero or more complete MUX PDUs 466, and finally a physical layer burst A possible local MUX PDU 468 at the end. Please note that the figure shows the respective parts of two consecutive MAC frames 460A and 460B. The sub-portion of MAC frame 460 A transmitted during frame f is identified by an additional "A". The sub-portion of MAC frame 460B transmitted during frame f + 1 is identified by an additional "B". When multiple MUX PDUs are connected in a MAC PDU in series, a local MUX PDU can be transmitted at the tail end of the MAC PDU. In this case, 96870.doc -54- 200525375 will be transmitted in the next MAC frame. The beginning of the transmitted MAC PDU transmits the remainder of the MUX PDU. This is illustrated in Figure 20 by the local MUX PDU 468A transmitted in the MAC frame 460A. The remainder of the MUXPDU 464B will be transmitted during the next MAC frame 460B. The MAC header consists of MUX indicator 2020 and MAC ID 20 10 which may be associated with MAC PDU. When spatial multiplexing is being used, the MAC ID may be required and there may be more than one MAC PDU transmitted at the same time. Those familiar with this technology should know when MAC ID 2010 should be deployed, and these are shaded to indicate these options. In this exemplary embodiment, a 2-byte MUX indicator 2020 is deployed per MAC PDU in order to identify the location of any MUX PDU transmitted in the MAC frame (as shown in Figure 20 from MUX indicator 2020 to MUX PDU 466A As shown by the arrows). Each MAC PDU uses the MUX indicator 2020. The MUX pointer points to the beginning of the first MUX PDU in the MAC PDU. The MUX indicator, together with the length field contained in each MUX PDU, allows the receiver's MUX layer to extract LL and PLC PDUs from a byte data stream (consisting of a continuous physical layer configured to the MAC ID). Those skilled in the art should understand that various alternative means for deploying indicators fall within the scope of the present invention. For example, from the example described above, the MAC frames can be encapsulated in an alternative order. A local MUXPDU can be placed at the end of the MAC frame configuration, and the indicator points to the beginning of the residual, rather than to the new MUX PDU. Therefore, a new PDU (if any) is placed at the beginning. Several indexing techniques can be deployed (ie, an index value to identify a tuple, a time value, a base value plus a shift, or any number known to those skilled in the art 96870.doc -55- 200525375 more Change plan). In this exemplary embodiment, the MUX indicator 2020 includes a single 16-bit field whose value is 1 plus the end of the MUX indicator starting at the beginning of the first MUX PDU at the beginning of the frame. Offset in bytes. If the value is 0, there is no MUX PDU for the start frame. If the value is 1, the MUX PDU will start immediately after the MUX indicator. If the value is η> 1, the first η-1 bytes in the MAC PDU are the trailing end of a MUX PDU that starts at the previous frame. This information helps the receiver MUX (ie, MUX function 360) recover from previous frame errors that caused loss of synchronization to the MUX PDU boundary. Those familiar with this technology should understand that any number of alternative indexing technologies can be deployed. A MUX header containing a type (logical channel) block and a length block is appended to all LL or RLC PDUs provided to the MUX. This type (logical channel) field identifies the LL or RLC entity to which the PDU belongs. As explained in the previous paragraph, the length field is used in conjunction with the MUX indicator to allow the receiving MUX layer to retrieve LL and PLC from the byte data stream (consisting of a continuous entity layer configured to the MAC ID). PDU. As mentioned above, the MUX function 360 maintains three queues for the data to be transmitted. The high QoS queue 362 may include an LL PDU associated with a negotiated service, and the admission control function 384 has configured a guaranteed transmission rate for the negotiated service. The best working queue 364 may include LL PDUs associated with a transmission rate guarantee. The control message queue 366 may include RLC and LLC PDUs. Alternative embodiments may include more than one QOS system. However, as described in this article, the efficient use of high transmission rate WLANs allows a single QoS queue to 96870.doc -56- 200525375 to achieve excellent QoS performance. In some cases, efficient use of available channel bandwidth through the MAC protocol will provide unnecessary additional queues and associated complexity. At the AP, the backlog in each queue is made available to the scheduler 376 in the common MAC function 370. At the AP, backlogs in their queues at υτ are maintained in the UT proxy server (prOxy) of the MUX function 360. Please note that, based on conciseness and clarity, the queues of their 11 proxy servers (1) 1 ^ 7) are not shown separately in Figure 3. Queues 362, 364, and 366 can be considered to include the forward link queue and the reverse link queue for each MAC ID (ie, the UT proxy server (pr〇xy) queue), regardless of the shared fw or Are there queues for deployment in separate components? Note that the number and type of forward link queues and reverse link queues supported need not be exactly the same. The UT proxy queue need not exactly match the UT queue. For example, the UT may maintain a command queue to give priority to certain time-sensitive commands over others (^ 〇8 PDU priority order. At the AP, unidirectional QoS may be used to indicate the two types of UT traffic. Therefore, the priority determined at the UT can be used to fill the configuration of the UT. As another example, different QoS queues can be maintained at the UT or AP, and they will not be maintained at the AP or UT. Maintain the QOS queue of the other party. The scheduler 376 arbitrates the competition requirements from all MAC IDs, and configures a physical layer to send to one or more selected MAC IDs on the F-TCH or R-TCH. Respond to one item Configuration, the corresponding MUX function 36 encapsulates B and RLCpDU into MAC PDU packet bearers' as described above. In this exemplary embodiment, each MUX function 360 will be in the following non-preemptive priority order 96870. doc -57- 200525375 (completely) servos PDUs from the following queues: control message queues 366, high QoS queues 362, and best working queues 364. Before new PDUs from higher priority queues are servoed, Complete any part from previous MAC PDU first PDU (even if the local PDU is from a lower priority queue). In alternative embodiments, preemptive priority may be deployed at one or more levels, as known to those skilled in the art. At the receiver The MUX function retrieves PDUs from a byte stream composed of consecutive MAC PDUs and sends them to the LL or RLC entity to which they belong. The path selection is based on the type field (logical in the MUX PDU header) Channel) as the basis. In this exemplary embodiment, according to the design of the MUX function, once a MUX PDU has started to be transmitted, this transmission will be completed before another MUX PDU can be started. Therefore, if a MAC message Frame to start transmitting a MUX PDU from the best working queue, it will complete this transmission in a subsequent MAC frame (or multiple frames) before transmitting from the control message queue or high QoS queue Other MUX PDUs. In other words, in normal operation, higher class queues have non-preemptive priority. In alternative embodiments, or in this exemplary embodiment, in some cases, one may want to Preemption Priority. For example, if the data rate of the physical layer has changed, it may be necessary to urgently transmit a control message, which needs to take precedence over the best work or high-QoS MUXPDUs. This is a permitted practice. Receive The party MUX will detect and discard incompletely transmitted MUX PDUs, which will be described in further detail below. Preemptive events (that is, changes in the transmission rate of the physical layer) can also cause changes that need to be made. 96870.doc -58- 200525375 This υτ is used by Fragment size. The fragment size used by υτ can be selected to enable non-preemptive priority in the MUX function to satisfy the minimum delay condition constraint or the service delay condition constraint of the control message queue. These techniques may be combined with the segmentation techniques explained above with reference to Figs. FIG. 21 illustrates an exemplary method for preparing a MAC frame using a MUX indicator. 2100 This method can be deployed in an AP or UT. As taught in this article, those skilled in the art can easily adapt this illustrative example to fit many specific embodiments (AP or UT). The procedure starts at step 2110, where the configuration for a MAC PDU is received. In decision step 2120, if the local MUx PDU from the previous MAC frame still exists, proceed to decision step 213. If no local Mux PDU exists, proceed to step 2150. In decision step 2130, if preemptive priority is desired, the local MUXPDU is not transmitted. The program proceeds to step 215. In this exemplary embodiment, a preemptive priority order may be used in some cases to transmit a time-sensitive command Mυχρ〇υ. Other examples of preemptive precedence have been detailed above. When it is desired to abandon the transfer of the remaining terms of Μχχ pDu, any preemptive condition can be used. The receiver of the MAC frame can directly discard the first part of the MUXPDU. In the following, the exemplary receiver function H is described in detail. In the alternative embodiment, the preemptive priority order may be defined in order to allow the MUx PDUs that have the preemptive priority order to be transmitted at a later time. Alternative embodiments may deploy any number of preemptive priority specifications for use in decision step 2130. If you do not want preemptive priority, proceed to step 2 140. 96870.doc -59- 200525375 In step 2140, first place the local MUX PDU in the MAC PDU. If the configuration is smaller than the local MUX PDU, the desired number of MUX PDUs can be used to fill the configuration, and the remaining items can be stored for transmission in subsequent MAC frame configurations. At step 2150, any new MUX PDUs can be placed in the MAC PDU. The MUX function determines the priority of placing MUX PDUs from any available queue. The exemplary priority mechanism has been described above, however, any priority mechanism can be deployed. In step 2160, the MUX indicator is set to the position of the first new MUXPDU. In this exemplary embodiment, a zero value MUX indicator means that no MUX PDU is included in the configuration. A 1-valued MUX indicator means that the first byte following the MUX header is the start of the next new MUX PDU (that is, there is no local MUX PDU at the beginning of the MAC PDU). Other MUX metric values indicate an appropriate boundary between more than one local MUX PDU and the start of any new MUX PDU. In alternative embodiments, other special MUX indicator values may be defined, or indicator value indicator mechanisms may be deployed. In step 2170, if there is still space in the configured MAC PDU, a partial MUX PDU may be placed in the remaining space. Alternatively, any class-like padding can be inserted into the remaining space. The remaining items of a partially placed MUX PDU can be stored for transmission in subsequent frame configurations. FIG. 22 illustrates an exemplary method 2200 for receiving a MAC frame including a MUX indicator. This method can be deployed in an AP or UT. As taught in this article, those skilled in the art can easily adapt this illustrative example to fit many specific embodiments (AP or UT). 96870.doc -60- 200525375 The program starts from step 22 10, where a MAC PDU is received. At step 2215, a MUX indicator is retrieved from the MAC PDU. In decision step 2220, if the MUX index is greater than 1, proceed to step 2225. In this exemplary embodiment, if the MUX indicator is 0 or 1, there is no local MUX PDU at the beginning of the MAC frame. A value of 0 MUX indicates that there are no MUX PDUs. In either case, proceed to decision step 2230. In decision step 2230, if there is a local MUX PDU stored from the previous MAC frame, then proceed to step 2235 and discard the previous frame stored. In this example, the remaining items of the stored frame have been prioritized. Alternative embodiments may allow the remainder of the stored frame to be transmitted later, in which case the previous local MUX PDU may be stored (details are not shown in the exemplified exemplary method 2200). In decision step 2230, if no local MUX PDU has been stored, or if the stored previous local MUX PDU is to be subsequently processed, the process proceeds to step 2240. At step 2240, a new MUX PDU is retrieved at the beginning of the position indicated by the MUX indicator. Please note that in this exemplary embodiment, a value of 0 MUX means that there is no new MUX PDU in the MAC PDU. Any new MUX PDU can be retrieved, including a new local MUX PDU. As mentioned above, the length field in the MUX PDU header can be used to define the boundaries of the MUX PDU. In decision step 2245, if the MAC PDU includes a local MUX PDU, proceed to step 2250 to store the local MUX PDU. This stored local MUX PDU can be combined with the remaining items from a future MAC PDU (unless it is later decided that the local MUX PDU should be discarded, as described above). At 96870.doc -61-200525375 decision step 2245, if the MAC PDU does not include any new local MUX PDUs, or if the local MUX PDU is already stored in step 2250, proceed to step 2255. At step 2255, any complete MUXPDU can be passed for further processing in the contract stack, including reassembly if appropriate, as described above. As mentioned above, the MUX function allows multiplexing of logical channels (F-TCH and R-TCH) within the traffic channel segment defined on the MAC frame. In this exemplary embodiment, the logical channel multiplexed by the MUX function is identified by a 4-bit message type plastic field in the MUX header. Table 1 details this example. Table 1: Logical channel type field Logical channel MUX type field (hexadecimal) UDCH0 0x0 UDCH1 0x1 UDCH2 0x2 UDCH3 0x3 RBCH 0x4 DCCH 0x5 LCCH 0x6 UBCH 0x7 UMCH 0x8 Type of exemplary MUX PDU. User data channel PDUs (UDCH0 2310, UDCH1 2320, UDCH2 2330, UDCH3 2340) can be used to transmit and receive user data. The PDU may be formed as described above with reference to FIG. 4. Each PDU includes a MUX header with type and length stops. The items following the MUX header are: LL header, 1-byte AL header, up to 4,087 bytes of data, and a 3-byte CRC. For UDCH0 2310, the LL standard 96870.doc -62- 200525375 header is 1 byte. For UDCHl 2320, the LL header is 2 bytes. For UDCH2 2330, the LL header is 3 bytes. For UDCH3 2340, the LL header is 4 bytes. The logical layer functions used to handle their LL PDU types have been detailed above. Various control messages PDUs 2350-2370 are also shown in FIG. Each PDU includes a MUX header with a type of block, a reserved field, and a length field. The item following the MUX header is a variable-length data field. This data field may be between 4 and 255 bytes, and includes the RLC message packet bearer. FIG. 23 illustrates a Radio Link Broadcast Channel (RBCH) PDU 2350, a Dedicated Control Channel PDU (DCCH) PDU 2360, and a Logical Link Control Channel (LLCH) PDU 2370. . The format of the User Broadcast Channel (UBCH) PDU and the User Multicast Channel (UMCH) PDU is exactly the same as the UDCH0 PDU 2310. The UBCH type field is set to 0111. The UMCH type block is set to 1000. Those skilled in the art should understand that their PDUs are for illustrative purposes only. Various additional PDUs and a subset of the PDUs shown can also be supported. In alternative embodiments, each field shown may have an alternate width. Other PDUs also contain additional stops. Exemplary Radio Link Control (RLC) The radio link control 340 has been described earlier, and exemplary embodiments will be further detailed in this paragraph. Table 2 presents a set of exemplary RLC messages. The exemplary messages described are merely examples, and a subset of their messages and additional messages may be deployed in various alternative specific 96870.doc -63- 200525375 embodiments. The size and type of fields in each message are also exemplary. According to the content taught in this article, those familiar with this technology can easily adjust the format of the Syrian alternative message. Table 2: RLC message types

訊息類型 訊 息 — RLCSystemConfigurationParameters 0x00 RLCReSChallengeACK 0x01 RLCHdwrIDReq 0x02 RLCSystemCapabilities 0x04 RLCCalibrationReqACK 0x05 RLCRLCalibrationMeasurementResult 0x40 RLCRegChallengeRej 0x44 RLCCalibrationReqRej 0x80 RLCRegChallenge 0x81 RLCHdwrIDReqACK 0x82 RLCSystemCapabilitiesACK 0x84 RLCCalibrationReq 0x85 RLCCalibrationMeasurementReq 0x87 RLCUTLinkStatus 0xC5 RLCRLCalibrationMeasurementResultNACK 在此實例中,所有RLC訊息都具有共同的結構,但可以 在數個傳輸頻道之一上載送彼等訊息。RLC PDU結構包 括··一八位元類型欄位,用於識別特定的RLC訊息;一由〇 至25 1個位元組所組成的封包承載;以及一由3個位元組所 組成的CRC欄位。表格3闡明使用類型欄位中的位元部分來 指示某類型RLC訊息。最高有效位元(MSB)0或1分別指示正 向鏈路訊息或反向鏈路訊息。當設定第二位MSB時,則該 訊息是一否定認可(NACK)或拒絕訊息。 96870.doc -64- 200525375 表格3 ·· RLC訊息類型欄位之位元位置意義 位元位置 意義 Οχχχχχχχ 正向鏈路訊息 1ΧΧΧΧΧΧΧ 反向鏈路訊息 xlxxxxxx NACK/拒絕訊息 在系統初始化期間,會初始化由系統識別控制功能346 所組成的廣播RLC功能。當UT使用來自存取集區的MAC-ID 來起始存取系統時,RLC功能會指派一新的MAC-ID給該 UT。接著,如果該UT加入一多點播送群組,則可被配置額 外的多點播送MAC-ID。當一新MAC-ID被指派給一UT時, RLC功能會初始化下列每項功能的一個執行個體 (instance) : AC 344、RRC 342 及 LLC 338,如上文所述。當 指派一新的多點播送MAC-ID時,RLC功能會初始化一新的 AC執行個體以及用於LL多點播送模式的LLC。 AP會使用廣播MAC-ID,每16個MAC訊框傳輸一系統識 別參數訊息(列在表格4中)一次。系統識別參數訊息包含網 路和AP ID以及協定版本號碼。此外,系統識別參數訊息還 包含供UT起始存取系統所使用的存取MAC-ID清單。表格4 列出其他示範性參數。 表格4 : RBCH上的系統識別參數訊息 參數名稱 位元數 --- 用途 RLC訊息類型 8 0x3F 網路ID 10 網路ID APID 6 存取點ID 前導隱蔽編碼 4 Wals ㈣導 1½ 莖pU〇t c〇ver c〇de)索引 96870.doc -65- 200525375 退回層級 4 採用的功率退回&〇wer backoff)機制(16個可能 值之一) AP修訂層級 4 軟體修§丁層級(revision level)及系統功能 RCH退回 4 RCH隨機退回因數 芳鄰清單 120 鄰接存取點及頻率配置 存取ro集區 4 存取ID集區 訊息長度 164 關聯控制(AC)功能提供UT鑑認。AC功能管理UT的註冊 (即,附加/卸離)功能。至於多點播送MAC-ID,AC功能會 · 管理一 UT附加/卸離多點播送群組。AC功能也管理用於LL 控制的加密金鍮交換。 會在來自UT的反向鏈路上傳送註冊查問訊息 (Registration Challenge Message),如表格5所示。UT 包括 一 24位元亂數(24-bit random number),用以允許AP區分同 時具有存取權且挑選相同MAC-ID的多個UT。 表格5 :註冊查問訊息 參數名稱 位元數 用 途 RLC訊息類型 8 0x80 MAC ID 10 指派給UT的臨時MAC ID 隨機ID 24 隨機查問以區分存取衝突 保留 6 未來使用 CRC 24 循環重複性檢查(cyclic redundancy check) 訊息長度 72 9個位元組 由AP傳輸註冊查問認可訊息(Registration ChallengeMessage Type Message - RLCSystemConfigurationParameters 0x00 RLCReSChallengeACK 0x01 RLCHdwrIDReq 0x02 RLCSystemCapabilities 0x04 RLCCalibrationReqACK 0x05 RLCRLCalibrationMeasurementResult 0x40 RLCRegChallengeRej 0x44 RLCCalibrationReqRej 0x80 RLCRegChallenge 0x81 RLCHdwrIDReqACK 0x82 RLCSystemCapabilitiesACK 0x84 RLCCalibrationReq 0x85 RLCCalibrationMeasurementReq 0x87 RLCUTLinkStatus 0xC5 RLCRLCalibrationMeasurementResultNACK In this example, all RLC messages have a common structure, but can be One of several transmission channels uploads their messages. The RLC PDU structure includes an eight-bit type field for identifying specific RLC messages; a packet bearer consisting of 0 to 25 1 bytes; and a CRC consisting of 3 bytes Field. Table 3 illustrates the use of the bit portion in the type field to indicate a certain type of RLC message. The most significant bit (MSB) of 0 or 1 indicates a forward link message or a reverse link message, respectively. When the second MSB is set, the message is a negative acknowledgement (NACK) or a rejection message. 96870.doc -64- 200525375 Table 3 · Bit position significance of RLC message type field Bit location significance System identification control function 346 is a broadcast RLC function. When the UT uses the MAC-ID from the access pool to initiate access to the system, the RLC function assigns a new MAC-ID to the UT. Then, if the UT joins a multicast group, it can be configured with an additional multicast MAC-ID. When a new MAC-ID is assigned to a UT, the RLC function initializes an instance of each of the following functions: AC 344, RRC 342, and LLC 338, as described above. When a new multicast MAC-ID is assigned, the RLC function initializes a new AC instance and an LLC for the LL multicast mode. The AP will use the broadcast MAC-ID to transmit a system identification parameter message (listed in Table 4) every 16 MAC frames. The system identification parameter message contains the network and AP ID and the protocol version number. In addition, the system identification parameter message contains a list of access MAC-IDs used by the UT-initial access system. Table 4 lists other exemplary parameters. Table 4: System identification parameter message on RBCH Parameter name number of bits --- Purpose RLC message type 8 0x3F Network ID 10 Network ID APID 6 Access point ID Leading concealment code 4 Wals ㈣Guide 1½ Stem pU〇tc〇 ver c〇de) index 96870.doc -65- 200525375 power back & 0wer backoff mechanism (one of 16 possible values) used to return level 4 AP revision level 4 software revision § revision level and system Function RCH return 4 RCH random return factor aromatic neighbor list 120 Adjacent access point and frequency configuration access ro pool 4 access ID pool message length 164 Association control (AC) function provides UT authentication. The AC function manages the registration (ie, attach / detach) functions of the UT. As for multicast MAC-ID, the AC function will manage a UT attach / detach multicast group. The AC function also manages cryptocurrency exchanges for LL control. A Registration Challenge Message is transmitted on the reverse link from the UT, as shown in Table 5. The UT includes a 24-bit random number, which allows the AP to distinguish between multiple UTs with access rights and the same MAC-ID. Table 5: Registration inquiry message parameter name bit number purpose RLC message type 8 0x80 MAC ID 10 temporary MAC ID assigned to UT random ID 24 random inquiry to distinguish access conflict reservation 6 future use of CRC 24 cyclic redundancy check check) Message length 72 9 bytes The registration challenge authentication message is transmitted by the AP.

Acknowledgement Message)(如表格6所示),以響應該註冊 查問訊息。該AP包括該UT所傳輸隨機ID。這允許解決介於 已挑選相同MAC-ID和存取時槽的UT之間的衝突。 96870.doc -66- 200525375 表格6 ··註冊查問認可訊息 參數名稱 位元數 用途 RLC訊息類型 8 0x00 MAC ID 10 指派給UT的臨時MAC ID 隨機ID 24 隨機查問以區分存取衝突 保留 6 保留供未來使用 CRC 24 循環重複性檢查 訊息長度 72 9個位元組 由AP傳送註冊查問拒絕訊息(Registration ChallengeAcknowledgement Message) (as shown in Table 6) in response to the registration inquiry message. The AP includes the random ID transmitted by the UT. This allows to resolve conflicts between UTs that have picked the same MAC-ID and access time slot. 96870.doc -66- 200525375 Form 6 ·· Registration inquiry authorization message parameter name bit number usage RLC message type 8 0x00 MAC ID 10 Temporary MAC ID assigned to UT Random ID 24 Random inquiry to distinguish access conflicts Reserved 6 Reserved for In the future, CRC 24 will be used to check the repeatability of the message. The length of the message will be 72. 9 bytes will be sent by the AP.

Reject Message)(如表格7所示)至一 UT,以拒絕臨時MAC ID 指派,例如,當兩個或兩個以上UT隨機選擇相同的臨時MAC ID時。 表格7 ··註冊查問拒絕訊息 參數名稱 位元數 用途 RLC訊息類型 8 0x40 MAC ID 10 指派給UT的臨時MAC ID 保留 6 未來使用 CRC 24 循環重複性檢查 訊息長度 48 6個位元組 由AP傳輸硬體ID要求訊息(Hardware ID RequestReject Message (as shown in Table 7) to a UT to reject temporary MAC ID assignment, for example, when two or more UTs randomly select the same temporary MAC ID. Table 7 · Registration inquiry rejection message Parameter name Number of bits Purpose RLC message type 8 0x40 MAC ID 10 Temporary MAC ID assigned to UT Reserved 6 Future use of CRC 24 Cyclic repeatability check message length 48 6 bytes transmitted by AP 1. hardware ID request message

Message)(如表格8所示),以從UT獲取硬體ID。 表格8 :硬體ID要求訊息 參數名稱 位元數 用途 RLC訊息類型 8 0x01 MAC ID 10 指派給UT的臨時MAC ID 保留 6 未來使用 CRC 24 循環重複性檢查 訊息長度 48 6個位元組 由UT傳輸硬體ID要求認可訊息(Hardware ID RequestMessage) (as shown in Table 8) to obtain the hardware ID from the UT. Table 8: Hardware ID request message parameter name bit number usage RLC message type 8 0x01 MAC ID 10 temporary MAC ID assigned to UT Reserved 6 future use of CRC 24 cyclic repeatability check message length 48 6 bytes transmitted by UT Hardware ID Request approval message

Acknowledgment Mess age)(如表格9所示),以響應該硬體ID 96870.doc -67- 200525375 要求訊息並且包括該UT的48位元硬體ID。(具體而言,UT 可使用的48位元IEEE MAC位址)。 表格9 :硬體ID要求認可訊息 爹數名稱 位元數 用途 RLC訊息類型 8 0x81 MAC ID 10 指派給UT的臨時MAC ID 硬體ID。 48 硬體ID號碼 保留 6 未來使用 CRC 24 循環重複性檢查 訊息長度 96 12個位元組 系統功能訊息(System Capabilities Message)(如表格10所 示)被傳輸至新註冊的UT,以向該UT指示AP功能。 表格10 :系統功能訊息 參數名稱 位元數 用途 RLC訊息類型 8 0x02 MAC ID 10 指派給UT的臨時MAC ID Nant 2 AP天線數量 Nal 8 支援的調節層數量 LISTal 8*Nal AP支援的調節層索引清單 Tbd Tbd 保留 4 未來使用 CRC 24 循環重複性檢查 訊息長度 變數 可變的位元組數 由UT傳送系統功能認可訊息(System CapabilitiesAcknowledgment Mess age) (as shown in Table 9) in response to the hardware ID 96870.doc -67- 200525375 request message and includes the 48-bit hardware ID of the UT. (Specifically, the 48-bit IEEE MAC address that the UT can use). Table 9: Hardware ID request acknowledgement message Daddy name Bit number Purpose RLC message type 8 0x81 MAC ID 10 Temporary MAC ID hardware ID assigned to the UT. 48 Hardware ID number reserved 6 Future use of CRC 24 Cyclic repeatability check Message length 96 12 bytes System Capabilities Message (as shown in Table 10) is transmitted to the newly registered UT to the UT Indicates AP function. Table 10: System Function Message Parameter Name Number of Bits Use RLC Message Type 8 0x02 MAC ID 10 Temporary MAC ID assigned to UT Nant 2 Number of AP antennas Nal 8 Number of supported adjustment layers LISTal 8 * Nal List of adjustment layer indexes supported by AP Tbd Tbd Reserved 4 Future use of CRC 24 Cyclic repeatability check Message length variable Variable number of bytes transmitted by the UT System Capabilities

Acknowledgment Message)(如表格11所示),以響應該系統 功能訊息’藉此向該AP指示該UT功能。 96870.doc 68 - 200525375 表格11 :系統功能認可訊息 參數名稱 位元數 用途 RLC訊息類型 8 0x82 MAC ID 10 指派給UT的臨時MAC ID Nant 2 AP天線數量 Nal 8 支援的調節層數量 LISTal 8*Nal AP&UT支援的調節層索引清單 保留 4 未來使用 CRC 24 循環重複性檢查 訊息長度 變數 可變的位元組數 會在每個UT處初始化一個無線電資源控制RRC執行個 體。會在AP處初始化每作用中UT—個RRC執行個體。位於 AP和UT處的RRC功能可共用正向和反向鏈路頻道度量(若 需要)。RRC管理位於AP與UT處之傳輸鏈和接收鏈之校 準。在此實例中,校準對於空間多工傳輸模式很有助益。 RRC決定用於傳至UT之傳輸的傳輸模式及傳輸率控制, 並且將決定結果提供給MAC排程器。RRC決定在R-TCH上 及F-TCH上(若需要)之實體層(PHY)叢發傳輸所需之專用 ΜΙΜΟ前導的週期性及長度。RRC管理在空間時間傳輸分集 (STTD)模式中傳至及來自一 UT之傳輸的功率控制,並將功 率控制提供給ΡΗΥ管理員。RRC決定來自UT之R-TCH傳輸 的時序調整。 由ΑΡ傳輸校準要求訊息(Request Request Message)(如夺 格12所示),以要求校準於UT。CalType攔位指示校準音歩貝 (calibration tone)集合以及將運用在校準程序的每天線# 準符號數量。 & 96870.doc -69- 200525375 表格12 :校準要求訊息 參數名稱 位元數 用 途 RLC訊息類型 8 0x84 MAC ID 10 指派給UT的臨時MAC ID Nant 2 UT天線數量 CalType 4 選擇校準程序 保留 8 未來使用 CRC 24 循環重複性檢查 訊息長度 56 6個位元組 表格13中列出校準類型(CalType)值。每個CalType各對應 於一組OFDM音頻集合以及校準所需的每天線校準符號數 量。校準前導符號(Calibration Pilot Symbol)使用Walsh序列 來建置跨發射天線的正交(orthogonality)。 表格13 :校準類型值Acknowledgment Message (as shown in Table 11) in response to the system function message 'to indicate to the AP the UT function. 96870.doc 68-200525375 Table 11: System Function Recognition Message Parameter Name Number of Bits Use RLC Message Type 8 0x82 MAC ID 10 Temporary MAC ID assigned to UT Nant 2 Number of AP antennas Nal 8 Number of supported adjustment layers LISTal 8 * Nal The AP & UT supports the adjustment layer index list reservation. 4 Future use of CRC 24. Cyclic repeatability check. Message length variable number of bytes will initialize a radio resource control RRC instance at each UT. The UT- RRC instance in each role will be initialized at the AP. RRC functions located at the AP and UT can share forward and reverse link channel metrics (if required). The RRC manages the calibration of the transmission and reception chains at the AP and UT. In this example, calibration is helpful for the spatial multiplexing mode. The RRC determines the transmission mode and transmission rate control for transmission to the UT, and provides the decision result to the MAC scheduler. The RRC determines the periodicity and length of the dedicated MIMO preambles required for the burst transmission on the physical layer (PHY) on the R-TCH and on the F-TCH (if required). The RRC manages the power control of transmissions to and from a UT in the space-time transmission diversity (STTD) mode, and provides power control to the PY administrator. The RRC determines the timing adjustment of the R-TCH transmission from the UT. The AP transmits a Calibration Request Message (as shown in Grid 12) to request calibration to the UT. The CalType stop indicates the set of calibration tones and the number of quasi symbols per day that will be used in the calibration routine. & 96870.doc -69- 200525375 Table 12: Calibration Request Message Parameter Name Number of Bits Use RLC Message Type 8 0x84 MAC ID 10 Temporary MAC ID Assigned to UT Nant 2 Number of UT Antennas CalType 4 Select Calibration Procedure Reserved 8 Future Use CRC 24 Cyclic Repeatability Check Message Length 56 6 Bytes Table 13 lists the CalType values. Each CalType corresponds to a set of OFDM audio sets and the number of daily line calibration symbols required for calibration. The Calibration Pilot Symbol uses Walsh sequences to build the orthogonality across the transmitting antennas. Table 13: Calibration type values

CalType 值 校準音頻 校準前導符綠量 0000 土7, 士21 4 0001 土3, 士7, 土 11,土 15, 士 18, 土21,士24, 土 26 4 0010 土1,士2,···,土 25, 士26 4 0011 RSVD 4 0100 土7, 土21 8 0101 士3, ±7, 士 11,士 15, 士 18, 士21,土24, 士26 8 0110 士1,士2,·.·,士25, 土26 8 0111 RSVD 8 1000 ±7, ±21 16 1001 土3, 士7, 士 11,土 15, 士 18, 土21,士24, ±26 16 1010 士 1,土 2,...,士 25, 士 26 16 1011 RSVD 16 1100 士7, 土21 32 1101 土3, ±7, 土 11,士 15, 士 18, ±21,士24, 土26 32 1110 土1,土2,...土25, 土26 32 1111 RSVD 32 由UT傳輸校準要求拒絕訊息(Request Request Reject Message)(如表格14所示),以拒絕來自AP的該校準要求訊 自、〇 96870.doc -70- 200525375 里測"於UT與AP間之頻道的校準前導(calibration Pilot)符 號。CalType value calibration audio calibration leader green amount 0000 soil 7, taxi 21 4 0001 soil 3, taxi 7, soil 11, soil 15, taxi 18, soil 21, taxi 24, soil 26 4 0010 soil 1, taxi 2, ··· ·, Soil 25, taxi 26 4 0011 RSVD 4 0100 soil 7, dirt 21 8 0101 taxi 3, ± 7, taxi 11, taxi 15, taxi 18, taxi 21, lawn 24, taxi 26 8 0110 taxi 1, taxi 2 ···, taxi 25, dirt 26 8 0 111 RSVD 8 1000 ± 7, ± 21 16 1001 dirt 3, taxi 7, taxi 11, dirt 15, taxi 18, dirt 21, taxi 24, ± 26 16 1010 taxi 1, dirt 2, ..., taxi 25, taxi 26 16 1011 RSVD 16 1100 taxi 7, dirt 21 32 1101 dirt 3, ± 7, dirt 11, taxi 15, taxi 18, ± 21, taxi 24, dirt 26 32 1110 dirt 1 , Soil 2, ... soil 25, soil 26 32 1111 RSVD 32 The UT transmits a Calibration Request Reject Message (as shown in Table 14) to reject the calibration request from the AP. .doc -70- 200525375 Li " calibration pilot symbol of the channel between UT and AP.

由AP傳迗校準量測結果訊息(R^uest Measurement 表格14 :校準要求拒絕訊息 參數名稱 位元數 用途 RLC訊息類型 8 0x44 MAC ID 10 指派給UT的臨時MAC ID 保留 6 未來使用 CRC 24 循環重複性檢查 訊息長度 48 6個位元組 由UT傳送校準量測要求訊息(Request MeasurementThe AP transmits the calibration measurement result message (R ^ uest Measurement Table 14: Calibration Request Rejection Message Parameter Name Bits Number Use RLC Message Type 8 0x44 MAC ID 10 Temporary MAC ID assigned to the UT Reserved 6 Future use of CRC 24 Cyclic Repeat The length of the sex check message is 48. 6 bytes The calibration measurement request message is sent by the UT.

Request Message)(如表格15所示)至AP。此訊息包括AP用於Request Message) (as shown in Table 15) to the AP. This message includes the AP used to

Result Message)(如表格16所示),用以將Ap針對該1;丁在該 枚準要求W息中所傳輸之校準符號所完成的頻道測量結果 提供給該UT。 在此實例中,每個校準量測結果訊息各載送一 Μ頻道之 4個音頻的頻道響應值、一2χ4頻道之至多8個音頻的頻道塑 應值或一 U4頻道之至多16個音頻的頻道響應值。可能需^ 至夕13個此汛息,以便載迗含已測量之個音頻的乜*頰道 96870.doc >71 - 200525375 之測量資料,所以還會採用一序號,藉以追蹤彼等訊息的 序列。假使沒有足夠的資料足以填滿整個資料欄位’則會 將貧料搁位的未使用部分設定為零。 表格16 :校準量測結果訊息 參數名稱 位元數 用途 RLC訊息類型 8 0x05 MAC ID 10 指派給UT的臨時MAC ID SEQ 4 訊息序號(至多13個訊息) 貧料搁位 1536 4個音頻的頻道響應值 保留 2 未來使用 CRC 24 循環重複性檢查 訊息長度 1584 198個位元組 傳送校準量測結果認可訊息(Calibration Measurement Result Acknowledgement Message)(如表格 17所示),藉以認 可該校準量測結果訊息的片段。 表格17 :校準量測結果認可訊息 參數名稱 位元數 用途 RLC訊息類型 8 0x04 MAC ID 10 指派給UT的臨時MAC ID SEQ 4 已認可之訊息序號 保留 2 未來使用 CRC 24 循環重複性檢查 訊息長度 48 6個位元組 同樣地,可能不會認可該校準量測結果認可訊息,在此 情況下,可在反向鏈路上傳輸一校準量測結果否定認可訊 息(Calibration Measurement Result NACK Message)(如表格 18所示),藉以否定認可(NACK)該校準量測結果訊息的片 段。 96870.doc -72- 200525375 表格1 8 :校準量測結果否定認可訊息 參數名稱 位元數 用途 RLC訊息類型 8 0xC5 MAC ID 10 指派給UT的臨時MAC ID " MODE 1 ACK模式(0=go-back-N(返回N) ; 1=選擇性番;^ SEQ 16 至多至多4個NACKed訊息的序號 保留 5 未來使用 一 CRC 24 循環重複性S查 一 " 訊息長度 64 8個位元組 校準量測結果訊息可能以go-back-Ν(返回N)或選擇性重 複為基礎予以否定認可。SEQ欄位係由四個連續的4位元片 段所組成,每個片段各表示一訊息序號。對於go-back-Ν模 式,MODE位元被設定為0,並且SEQ攔位的第一個片段指 示必須重複之序列中的第一個訊息之序號。在此情況下’ SEQ欄位中其餘的12位位元被設定為0且被忽略。對於選擇 性重複模式,MODE位元被設定為1,並且SEQ欄位保存必 須重複之至多四個訊息之序號。如果少於四個訊息必須被 重複,則僅含有非零值之片段才具有意義。會忽略所有零 值片段。 由AP傳送UT鏈路狀態訊息(UT Link Status Message)(如 表格19所示),藉以要求UT提供反饋。在此實例中,UT必 須提供有關緩衝器狀態(已積存之資料量和Q〇s類別)以及 鏈路品質(ΜΙΜΟ及控制頻道所支援的正向鏈路傳輸率)的 反饋。 96870.doc -73 - 200525375 表格19 : UT鏈政狀態訊息 參數名稱 位元數 用途 RLC訊息類型 8 0x87 " --- MAC ID 10 UT一BUF 一 STAT 16 ίϋϋΗ#線電鏈路緩衝器狀態 FL—RATE一 STAT 16 高可支援的FL傳輸率(值tbd) QOS—FLAG 2 才曰不出RL包含高優先順序資料 CCH一 SUB 一CHAN 2 指不出較佳CCH子頻道 保留 2 未來使用 · CRC 24 循%重複性檢杳 訊息長度 80 10個位元組 UT-BUF—STAT指示UT無線電鏈路緩衝器大小(以四位元 組為增量單位)。(^????值指示大於或等於262,140個位元 組之緩衝器大小。FL_RATE_STAT提供每模式最大正向鏈 路傳輸率(每模式4位位元)。對於分集模式,僅仗用前四位 最高有效位元。其餘12位位元被設定為〇。Q〇S_FLAG指示 出RL緩衝器是否包含高優先順序資料。表格20中定義值 QOS_FLAG。 表格 20 : QOS一FLAG值 值 意義 00 無優先順序資料 01 優先順序資料 10-11 保留 在UT處,由RRC建立該UT鏈路狀態訊息。在AP處,該 UT鏈路狀態訊息被轉遞至用於提供值給UT代理伺服器 (proxy)的 RRC 〇 此段落中所說明的示範性RRC具體實施例可結合整份說 明書中所詳細之各項具體實施例一起部署。熟悉此項技術 96870.doc -74- 200525375 者應明白這項示範性具體實施例僅供例證用途,並且按照 本文講授内容就會明瞭許多替代具體實施例。此下一段落 中會說明控制頻道之示範性具體實施例,其適合結合整份 說明書中所詳細之各項具體實施例一起部署。 示範性控制頻道(CCH) 如上文所述,存取MAC訊框及指派資源受控於控制頻道 (CCH),控制頻道(CCH)依據來自排程器的指令來指派 F-TCH及R-TCH資源給MAC ID。這些資源授予可能是一對 於相關聯於該特定MAC ID之AP處一或多個佇列的已知狀 態之回應,或是一對於相關聯於該MAC ID之UT處一或多個 佇列的已知狀態之回應,如同對應之UT代理伺服器(proxy) 中資訊的反映。資源授予也可能是一對於在一存取要求頻 道(Access Request Channel ; ARCH)接收到之存取要求的回 應,或是對於排程器可取得之某其他刺激(stimulus)或資訊 的回應。下文會詳細說明CCH的示範性具體實施例。此項 示範性CCH係當做可部署在如上文所述之高效能WLAN中 的各項控制機制之例證。替代具體實施例可包括額外功 能,以及下文所述之功能的子集。下文所述之欄位名稱、 欄位寬度、參數值等等僅僅是例證說明。熟悉此項技術者 很容易調整所說明之原理以配置屬於本發明範疇内的許多 替代具體實施例。 示範性CCH係由4個分離的子頻道所組成,每個子頻道各 以不同資料傳輸率運作,如表格21所示。表格21中所使用 的用詞已為此項技術所熟知(SNR表示訊雜比(Signal to 96870.doc -75- 200525375Result Message) (as shown in Table 16), which is used to provide the UT with the channel measurement result completed by the calibration symbol transmitted by the AP in the standard request message. In this example, each calibration measurement result message carries a channel response value of 4 audio of one M channel, a channel response value of up to 8 audio of a 2 × 4 channel, or a maximum of 16 audio of a U4 channel. Channel response value. It may take ^ till the evening of 13 floods to contain the measurement data of the measured buccal channel * buccal path 96870.doc > 71-200525375, so a serial number is also used to track their information. sequence. If there is not enough data to fill the entire data field ’, the unused portion of the lean shelf will be set to zero. Table 16: Calibration measurement results Message parameter name Number of bits Use RLC message type 8 0x05 MAC ID 10 Temporary MAC ID assigned to the UT SEQ 4 Message sequence number (up to 13 messages) Lean material stall 1536 4 audio channel response Value reserved 2 In the future, the CRC 24 cycle repeatability check message length 1584 198 bytes will be used to transmit the Calibration Measurement Result Acknowledgement Message (as shown in Table 17) to recognize the calibration measurement result message. Fragment. Table 17: Calibration measurement results Approved message parameter name Number of bits Use RLC message type 8 0x04 MAC ID 10 Temporary MAC ID assigned to UT SEQ 4 Approved message sequence number reserved 2 Future use of CRC 24 Cyclic repeatability check message length 48 Similarly, the 6 bytes may not recognize the calibration measurement result approval message. In this case, a Calibration Measurement Result NACK Message (such as a table) may be transmitted on the reverse link. (Shown in Fig. 18), by which the fragment of the calibration measurement result message is NACKed. 96870.doc -72- 200525375 Table 1 8: Calibration measurement result negative approval message parameter name bit number purpose RLC message type 8 0xC5 MAC ID 10 Temporary MAC ID assigned to UT " MODE 1 ACK mode (0 = go- back-N (return N); 1 = selective number; ^ SEQ 16 No. of up to 4 NACKed messages are reserved 5 future use of a CRC 24 cyclic repeatability S check " message length 64 8 bytes calibration amount The test result message may be negatively approved based on go-back-N or selective repetition. The SEQ field is composed of four consecutive 4-bit segments, each of which represents a message sequence number. For In go-back-N mode, the MODE bit is set to 0, and the first segment of the SEQ block indicates the sequence number of the first message in the sequence that must be repeated. In this case, the remaining 12 in the SEQ field The bit is set to 0 and ignored. For the selective repeat mode, the MODE bit is set to 1, and the SEQ field holds the sequence number of up to four messages that must be repeated. If less than four messages must be repeated, Only fragments with non-zero values Meaning. All zero-value segments are ignored. The UT Link Status Message (as shown in Table 19) is transmitted by the AP to request feedback from the UT. In this example, the UT must provide information about the buffer status ( The amount of accumulated data and QOS class) and the feedback of the link quality (MIMO and the forward link transmission rate supported by the control channel). 96870.doc -73-200525375 Table 19: UT chain government status message parameter names Number of bits used RLC message type 8 0x87 " --- MAC ID 10 UT_BUF_STAT 16 ϋϋΗ # Wire link buffer status FL_RATE_STAT 16 Highly supported FL transmission rate (value tbd) QOS —FLAG 2 It is said that RL does not contain high-priority data CCH_SUB_CHAN 2 No better CCH sub-channel reservation 2 Future use · CRC 24 cyclic% repetition check message length 80 10 bytes UT- BUF_STAT indicates the UT radio link buffer size (in octets increments). (^ ???? The value indicates a buffer size greater than or equal to 262,140 bytes. FL_RATE_STAT provides each mode Maximum forward chain Transmission rate (bits per mode 4). For diversity mode, only the battle with the top four most significant bits. The remaining 12 bits are set to zero. Q〇S_FLAG indicates whether the RL buffer contains high priority data. The value QOS_FLAG is defined in Table 20. Table 20: QOS-FLAG value Value Meaning 00 No priority data 01 Priority data 10-11 Reserved At the UT, the RRC establishes the link status information of the UT. At the AP, the UT link status message is forwarded to the RRC used to provide a value to the UT proxy server. The exemplary RRC specific embodiments described in this paragraph can be combined with details detailed throughout the specification. The specific embodiments are deployed together. Those familiar with the technology 96870.doc -74- 200525375 should understand that this exemplary embodiment is for illustrative purposes only, and that many alternative embodiments will be apparent in accordance with the teachings herein. Exemplary specific embodiments of the control channel will be described in the next paragraph, which are suitable for deployment in combination with the specific embodiments detailed in the entire specification. Exemplary Control Channel (CCH) As described above, access to the MAC frame and assignment of resources are controlled by the control channel (CCH). The control channel (CCH) assigns F-TCH and R-TCH based on instructions from the scheduler The resource gives the MAC ID. These resource grants may be a response to a known state of one or more queues at the AP associated with that particular MAC ID, or a response to one or more queues at the UT associated with that MAC ID. The response of the known state is like the reflection of the information in the corresponding UT proxy server. The resource grant may also be a response to an access request received on an Access Request Channel (ARCH), or a response to some other stimulus or information available to the scheduler. Exemplary specific embodiments of the CCH are described in detail below. This exemplary CCH is an example of various control mechanisms that can be deployed in a high-performance WLAN as described above. Alternative embodiments may include additional functions, and a subset of the functions described below. The field names, field widths, parameter values, etc. described below are just examples. Those skilled in the art can easily adapt the illustrated principles to configure many alternative embodiments that fall within the scope of the invention. The exemplary CCH is composed of 4 separate sub-channels, each of which operates at a different data transmission rate, as shown in Table 21. The terminology used in Table 21 is well known in the art (SNR stands for Signal to Noise Ratio (Signal to 96870.doc -75- 200525375

Noise Ratio),以及 FER 表示正向錯誤率(Forward Error Rate),也是此項技術所熟知)。CCH結合STTD來使用短型 OFDM符號。這意謂著每個邏輯頻道都是由偶數個短型 OFDM符號所組成。在隨機存取反饋頻道(RFCH)及訊框控 制頻道(FCCH)上傳送的訊息被格式化成為資訊元素 (Information Element ; IE),並且會在該等CCH子頻道之一 上予以傳輸。 表格21 : CCH邏輯頻道的資料傳輸率結構Noise Ratio) and FER stands for Forward Error Rate (also known in the art). CCH uses short OFDM symbols in conjunction with STTD. This means that each logical channel is made up of an even number of short OFDM symbols. Messages transmitted on the Random Access Feedback Channel (RFCH) and Frame Control Channel (FCCH) are formatted as Information Element (IE) and transmitted on one of these CCH subchannels. Table 21: Data transmission rate structure of CCH logical channels

CCH頻道 效率 (bps/Hz) 碼率 調變 每STTD OFBM 符號的資訊位元數 1% FER 的總SNR CCH—0 0.25 0.25 BPSK 24 -2.0 dB CCH 1 0.5 0.5 BPSK 48 2.0 dB CCH—2 1 0.5 QPSK 96 5.0 dB CCH—3 2 0.5 16QAM 192 11.0 dB BCCH指示CCH—MASK參數中是否有一既定CCH子頻道 存在或不存在。下面表格22中提供每個CCH子頻道各式(其 中N標示子頻道尾碼0到3)。格式包括多個欄位,用於指示 IE數量、IE本身、CRC、填零項(若需求)及尾端位元。AP 決定要用於每個IE的子頻道。屬於使用者終端機(UT)特有 的IE類型係在用於最大化該UT之傳輸效率的CCH子頻道上 予以傳輸。如果AP無法精確決定相關聯於一既定UT的傳輸 率,則可使用CCH—0。廣播/多點播送IE類型係在CCH_0上 予以傳輸。 96870.doc -76- 200525375 表格22 : CCH子頻道結構 CCH一N欄位 位元數 CCH_N_IE 數量 8 CCH一N—IE 變數 CCH一N 的 CRC 16 填零項 變數 尾端 6 CCH係以最低至最高傳輸率予以傳輸。會提供每個CCH 子頻道的一 CRC。所有UT都會嘗試解碼每個以最低傳輸率 CCH開始傳輸的每個CCH。無法正確解碼謂著被 解碼的較傳輸率CCH有錯誤。每個CCH子頻道都能夠傳輸 至多32個IE。 CCH傳輸頻道被映射至兩個邏輯頻道。RFCH包括對在 RCH上接收到之存取嘗試的認可。FCCH包括資源配置 (即,F-TCH和R-TCH上的實體層訊框指派)、實體層控制功 能(包含有關F-TCH和R-TCH的實體層資料傳輸率控制、 R-TCH專用前導插入、R-TCH時序以及R-TCH功率控制。 FCCH還可包括一 R-TCHR-TCH,用以向一 UT要求一緩衝器 和鏈路狀態更新。 一般而言,在此具體實施例中,在CCH上傳送的資訊屬 於時間關鍵型資訊,並且會被目前MAC訊框内的收件者所 採用。 表格23列出CCH資訊元素類型及各自的類型值。下文會 進一步詳述資訊元素格式。在下面的表格中,所有的位移 值係以800奈米為單位。 96870.doc -77- 200525375 表格23 : CCH IE類型指派 IE類型 資訊元素 0x0 RegistrationReqACK 0x1 FwdDivModeAssign 0x2 FwdDivModeAssignStat 0x3 FwdSpaModeAssign 0x4 FwdSpaModeAssignStat 0x5 RevDivModeAssign 0x6 RevSpaModeAssign 0x7 DivModeAssign 0x8 SpaModeAssign 0x9 LinkStatusReq OxA CalRequestAck OxB CalRequestRej 表格24顯示註冊要求認可IE (Registration Request Acknowledgment IE)(RFCH)(表格 23 中標示為 RegistrationReqACK) 的格式。該註冊要求認可係用於回應在該RCH上接收自一 UT的註冊要求。格式包括一 IE類型、一時槽ID、該存取ID(由 UT選擇並包含在其註冊要求中)、指派給該UT的MAC ID以 及一時序進階值。CCH channel efficiency (bps / Hz) Bit rate modulation 1% of total information bits per STTD OFBM symbol FER total SNR CCH—0 0.25 0.25 BPSK 24 -2.0 dB CCH 1 0.5 0.5 BPSK 48 2.0 dB CCH—2 1 0.5 QPSK 96 5.0 dB CCH-3 2 0.5 16 QAM 192 11.0 dB BCCH indicates whether a predetermined CCH subchannel exists or does not exist in the CCH-MASK parameter. Table 22 below provides the various types of each CCH subchannel (where N indicates the subchannel end codes 0 to 3). The format includes multiple fields to indicate the number of IEs, the IE itself, the CRC, zero-filled items (if required), and trailing bits. The AP decides which subchannel to use for each IE. The IE type unique to the user terminal (UT) is transmitted on the CCH subchannel used to maximize the transmission efficiency of the UT. If the AP cannot accurately determine the transmission rate associated with a given UT, then CCH-0 may be used. The broadcast / multicast IE type is transmitted on CCH_0. 96870.doc -76- 200525375 Table 22: CCH sub-channel structure CCH_N field number CCH_N_IE number 8 CCH_N_IE variable CCH_N CRC 16 Zero-filling variable tail 6 CCH is from lowest to highest The transmission rate is transmitted. A CRC is provided for each CCH subchannel. All UTs try to decode every CCH that starts with the lowest transmission rate CCH. Failure to decode correctly means that the higher transmission rate CCH being decoded has errors. Each CCH subchannel can transmit up to 32 IEs. The CCH transmission channel is mapped to two logical channels. The RFCH includes acknowledgement of access attempts received on the RCH. The FCCH includes resource allocation (that is, physical layer frame assignment on F-TCH and R-TCH), physical layer control functions (including physical layer data transmission rate control on F-TCH and R-TCH, and R-TCH dedicated preamble Insertion, R-TCH timing, and R-TCH power control. The FCCH may also include an R-TCHR-TCH to request a buffer and link status updates from a UT. Generally speaking, in this specific embodiment, The information transmitted on the CCH is time-critical and will be used by the recipients in the current MAC frame. Table 23 lists the CCH information element types and their respective type values. The format of the information elements will be further detailed below. In the table below, all displacement values are in units of 800 nanometers. 96870.doc -77- 200525375 Table 23: CCH IE Type Assignment IE Type Information Element 0x0 RegistrationReqACK 0x1 FwdDivModeAssign 0x2 FwdDivModeAssignStat 0x3 FwdSpaModeAssignMode 0x5 RevAssign 0x7 DivModeAssign 0x8 SpaModeAssign 0x9 LinkStatusReq OxA CalRequestAck OxB CalRequestRej Table 24 shows The Registration Request Recognition IE (Registration Request Acknowledgment IE) (RFCH) (labeled RegistrationReqACK in Form 23). The registration request approval is used in response to a registration request received from a UT on the RCH. The format includes an IE type, A slot ID, the access ID (selected by the UT and included in its registration request), the MAC ID assigned to the UT, and a timing advanced value.

表格24 :註冊要求認可IE 欄位 位元數 作用 IE TYPE 4 0x0 SLOT—ID 5 UT存取RCH所使用的時槽ID ACCESS ID 10 UT使用的存取ID MAC ID 10 指派給UT的臨時MAC ID REV一TIMING ADV 7 R-TCH TX時間進階(以樣本為單位) 總數 36 表格25顯示F-TCH分集模式指派IE(F-TCH Diversity Mode Assignment IE)(FCCH)(表格 23 中標示為 FwdDivModeAssign)的 格式。該F-TCH分集模式指派用於指示將使用分集模式在 96870.doc -78- 200525375 F-TCH上傳輸之MAC PDU。分集是包括的另一 STTD限期。 格式包括一 IE類型、一 MAC ID、一F_TCH位移(用於指示 MAC訊框中MAC PDU的位置)、使用的傳輸率、封包中的 OFDM符號數量、前導項類型(下文會詳細說明)以及封包中 的短型OFDM符號數量。Form 24: Registration requirements recognize the number of IE fields. IE TYPE 4 0x0 SLOT-ID 5 Time slot ID used by UT to access RCH ACCESS ID 10 Access ID used by UT MAC ID 10 Temporary MAC ID assigned to UT REV_TIMING ADV 7 R-TCH TX time advanced (in samples) Total 36 Table 25 shows F-TCH Diversity Mode Assignment IE (FCCH) (labeled as FwdDivModeAssign in Table 23) Format. The F-TCH diversity mode assignment is used to indicate the MAC PDUs to be transmitted on the 96870.doc -78- 200525375 F-TCH using the diversity mode. Diversity is another STTD deadline included. The format includes an IE type, a MAC ID, an F_TCH offset (used to indicate the position of the MAC PDU in the MAC frame), the transmission rate used, the number of OFDM symbols in the packet, the type of the leading item (described in detail below), and the packet The number of short OFDM symbols in.

参 ft2ii式指派 IE 欄位 位元數 作用 IE—TYP 4 0x1 MAC 一 ID 10 指派給UT的MAC ID FWD 一 OFFSET 12 F-TCH位移 FWD 一RATE 4 nCH傳輸率 FWD 一PREAMBLE 2 F-TCH前導項類型 FWD 一N—LONG 7 封包中的長型OFDM符號數量 FWD 一N—SHORT 2 封包中的短型OFDM符號數量 總數 41 表格26顯示含R-TCH狀態的F-TCH分集模式指派 IE(FCCH)(表格 23 中標示為 FwdDivModeAssignStat)的格 式。此IE係用於指示將使用分集模式在F-TCH上傳輸之 MAC PDU,並且會配置用於回應一狀態要求的R-TCH空 間。格式包括FwdDivModeAssign攔位。此外,格式還包括 一配置位移,以供UT在R-TCH上報告其缓衝器狀態。用於 R-TCH上之鏈路狀態訊息的配置指定R-TCH前導項類型, 以及反向參數,包括傳輸率、時序調整、狀態訊息要求位 元和鏈路狀態封包中的長型和短型OFDM符號數量。 96870.doc -79- 200525375Refer to the ft2ii type to assign the number of IE fields. IE-TYP 4 0x1 MAC-ID 10 MAC ID assigned to UT FWD-OFFSET 12 F-TCH shift FWD-RATE 4 nCH transmission rate FWD-PREAMBLE 2 F-TCH leading item Type FWD_N_LONG 7 Number of long OFDM symbols in the packet FWD_N_SHORT 2 Total number of short OFDM symbols in the packet 41 Table 26 shows the F-TCH diversity mode assignment IE (FCCH) with R-TCH (FwdDivModeAssignStat in Table 23). This IE is used to indicate the MAC PDUs to be transmitted on the F-TCH using diversity mode, and R-TCH space is configured to respond to a status request. The format includes FwdDivModeAssign blocks. In addition, the format includes a configuration shift for the UT to report its buffer status on the R-TCH. The configuration for the link status message on the R-TCH specifies the type of the R-TCH preamble, and the reverse parameters, including the transmission rate, timing adjustment, status message requirements, and long and short types in the link status packet Number of OFDM symbols. 96870.doc -79- 200525375

表格26 :含R-TCH狀態的F-TCH分集模式指派IE 搁位 位元數 作用 IE TYPE 4 0x2 MACJD 10 指派給UT的MAC ID FWD一 OFFSET 12 F-TCH位移 FWD—RATE 4 F-TCH傳輸率 FWD—N一LONG 7 封包中的長型OFDM符號數量 FWD 一PREAMBLE 2 F-TCH前導項類型 FWD—N—SHORT 2 封包中的短型OFDM符號數量 REV—OFFSET 12 R-TCH位移 REV—PREAMBLE 2 R-TCH前導項類型 REV—RATE 4 R-TCH傳輸率 REV—TIMING 2 R-TCH時序調整 REV一 STATUS 一REQ 1 R-TCH狀態訊息要求 REV—N—LONG 7 鏈路狀態封包中的長型OFDM符號數量 REV—N—SHORT 2 鏈路狀態封包中的短型OFDM符號數量 總數 71 FWD—PREAMBLE和REV_PREAMBLE欄位分別提供在反向 鏈路上使用之前導項的長度以及在反向鏈路上傳送的狀態 訊息。前導項係由表格27中提供之短型OFDM符號數量所組 成,僅載送用於主要特徵模態(eigenmode)的操控參考(steered reference) ° 表格 27 : FWD—PREAMBLE、REVJPREAMBLE值 值 意義 00 無前導項 01 四個前導項 10 八個前導項 11 保留 表格28顯示F-TCH空間多工模式指派IE(F-TCH Spatial Multiplex Mode Assignment IE)(FCCH)(表格 23 中標示為 96870.doc -80- 200525375Table 26: F-TCH diversity mode with R-TCH status assignment IE number of slots role IE TYPE 4 0x2 MACJD 10 MAC ID assigned to UT FWD_OFFSET 12 F-TCH shift FWD_RATE 4 F-TCH transmission Rate FWD—N—LONG 7 Number of long OFDM symbols in the packet FWD—PREAMBLE 2 F-TCH preamble type FWD—N—SHORT 2 Number of short OFDM symbols in the packet REV—OFFSET 12 R-TCH shift REV—PREAMBLE 2 R-TCH leading item type REV-RATE 4 R-TCH transmission rate REV-TIMING 2 R-TCH timing adjustment REV-STATUS-REQ 1 R-TCH status message requires REV-N-LONG 7 Long in the link status packet Number of type OFDM symbols REV_N_SHORT 2 Total number of short OFDM symbols in the link state packet 71 FWD_PREAMBLE and REV_PREAMBLE fields respectively provide the length of the previous leading term used on the reverse link and transmitted on the reverse link Status message. The leading term consists of the number of short OFDM symbols provided in Table 27, and only carries the steered reference for the main characteristic mode (eigenmode) ° Table 27: FWD—PREAMBLE, REVJPREAMBLE Value Meaning 00 None Leading Item 01 Four Leading Items 10 Eight Leading Items 11 Reserved Table 28 shows F-TCH Spatial Multiplex Mode Assignment IE (FCCH) (labeled 96870.doc -80 in Table 23) -200525375

FwdSpaModeAssign)的格式。此IE的欄位類似於 FwdDivModeAssign,惟使用空間多工(而不是使用分集)除外。FwdSpaModeAssign). This IE field is similar to FwdDivModeAssign, except that it uses spatial multiplexing instead of diversity.

表格28 : F-TCH空間多工模式指派IE 搁位 位元數 作用 IE TYPE 4 0x3 MAC—ID 10 指派給UT的MAC ID FWD 一 OFFSET 12 F-TCH位移 FWD—RATE 16 F-TCH空間模式0-3的傳輸率 FWD—PREAMBLE 2 F-TCH前導項類型 FWD—N一LONG 7 封包中的長型OFDM符號數量 FWD_N—SHORT 2 封包中的短型OFDM符號數量 總數 53 表格29顯示含R-TCH狀態的F-TCH空間多工模式指派 IE(FCCH)(表格 23 中標示為 FwdSpaModeAssignStat)的格 式。此IE的欄位類似於FwdDivModeAssignStat,惟使用空 間多工(而不是使用分集)除外。Table 28: F-TCH space multiplexing mode assignment IE number of slots role IE TYPE 4 0x3 MAC-ID 10 MAC ID assigned to UT FWD_OFFSET 12 F-TCH shift FWD_RATE 16 F-TCH space mode 0 -3 transmission rate FWD_PREAMBLE 2 F-TCH preamble type FWD_N_LONG 7 Number of long OFDM symbols in the packet FWD_N_SHORT 2 Total number of short OFDM symbols in the packet 53 Table 29 shows the R-TCH Format of the stateful F-TCH spatial multiplexing mode assignment IE (FCCH) (labeled as FwdSpaModeAssignStat in Table 23). This IE field is similar to FwdDivModeAssignStat, except that spatial multiplexing is used instead of diversity.

表格29 :含R-TCH狀態的F-TCH空間多工模式指派IE 攔位 位元數 作用 IE TYPE 4 "〇^4 -- MAC—ID 10 指派給UT的MAC ID FWD—OFFSET 12 F-TCH位移 FWD—RATE 16 F-1 (JH空間模式0-3的傳輸率 FWD 一 PREAMBLE 2 F-TCH前導項類型 FWD—N一LONG 7 封包中的長型OFDM符號數量 FWD 一N—SHORT 2 封包中的短型OFDM符號數量 REV—OFFSET 12 R-TCH位移 REV—PREAMBLE 2 R-TCH前導項類型 REV—RATE 4 R-TUH傳輸率 REV一 TIMING 2 ~R:tch ^~~ REV一 STATUS—REQ 1 109¾¾要求 REV—N—LONG 7 鏈路狀態封包中的長型OFDM符號數量 REV 一N—SHORT 2 鏈路狀態封包中的短型OFDM符號數量 總數 83 96870.doc * 81 - 200525375 表格30顯示R-TCH分集模式指派IE(R-TCH Diversity Mode Assignment IE)(FCCH)(表格 23 中標示為 RevDivModeAssign)的格式。此IE係用於使用分集模式以訊 號發出一用於MAC PDU之R-TCH配置。此IE包括如上文所 述的MAC ID欄位。此IE還包括如上文所述之狀態要求訊息 中所包含的反向鍵路欄位(FwdDivModeAssignStat和 FwdSpaModeAssignStat) 〇此IE進一步包括一反向傳輸功率 調整欄位。Table 29: F-TCH spatial multiplexing mode assignment with R-TCH status IE number of blocking bits role IE TYPE 4 " 〇 ^ 4-MAC_ID 10 MAC ID assigned to UT FWD_OFFSET 12 F- TCH shift FWD—RATE 16 F-1 (JH space mode 0-3 transmission rate FWD-PREAMBLE 2 F-TCH preamble type FWD-N-LONG 7 Number of long OFDM symbols in the packet FWD-N-SHORT 2 packets Number of short OFDM symbols in the REV_OFFSET 12 R-TCH shift REV_PREAMBLE 2 R-TCH preamble type REV_RATE 4 R-TUH transmission rate REV_TIMING 2 ~ R: tch ^ ~~ REV_STATUS_REQ 1 109¾¾ Requires REV—N—LONG 7 Number of long OFDM symbols in the link state packet REV N-SHORT 2 Total number of short OFDM symbols in the link state packet 83 96870.doc * 81-200525375 Table 30 shows R -TCH Diversity Mode Assignment IE (FCCH) (RevDivModeAssign in Table 23) format. This IE is used to signal an R-TCH configuration for MAC PDUs using diversity mode. This IE includes the MAC ID field as described above. This IE also includes the status as described above The reverse key fields (FwdDivModeAssignStat and FwdSpaModeAssignStat) included in the status request message. This IE further includes a reverse transmission power adjustment field.

表格30 : R-TCH分集模式指派IE 欄位 位元數 作用 IE TYPE 4 0x5 MAC—ID 10 指派給UT的MAC ID REV一 OFFSET 12 R-TCH位移 REV—PREAMBLE 2 R-TCH前導項類型 REV—RATE 4 R-TCH傳輸率 REV—TIMING 2 R-TCH TX時序調整 REV一 STATUS—REQ 1 R-TCH狀態訊息要求 REV一N—LONG 7 封包中的長型OFDM符號數量 REV一N—SHORT 2 封包中的短型OFDM符號數量 REV一 POWER 2 R-TCH TX功率調整 總數 46 表格3 1顯示R-TCH空間多工模式指派IE(R-TCH Spatial Multiplex Mode Assignment IE)(FCCH)(表格 23 中標示為 RevSpaModeAssign)的格式。此IE的欄位類似於 Re vDivMode As si gn,惟使用空間多工(而不是使用分集)除 外0 96870.doc -82- 200525375Table 30: R-TCH diversity mode assignment IE field number function IE TYPE 4 0x5 MAC-ID 10 MAC ID assigned to UT REV_OFFSET 12 R-TCH shift REV—PREAMBLE 2 R-TCH leading item type REV— RATE 4 R-TCH transmission rate REV_TIMING 2 R-TCH TX timing adjustment REV_STATUS_REQ 1 R-TCH status message requires REV_N_LONG 7 Number of long OFDM symbols in the packet REV_N_SHORT 2 packets Number of short OFDM symbols in the REV-POWER 2 R-TCH TX total power adjustment 46 Table 3 1 shows the R-TCH Spatial Multiplex Mode Assignment IE (FCCH) (labeled in Table 23 The format is RevSpaModeAssign). This IE field is similar to Re vDivMode As si gn, except that it uses spatial multiplexing (instead of diversity) 0 96870.doc -82- 200525375

表格31 : R-TCH空間多工模式指派IE 欄位 位元數 作用 IETYPE 4 0x6 MAC 一 ID 10 指派給UT的MAC ID REV—OFFSET 12 R_tch位移 REV—PREAMBLE 2 R-TCH前導項類型 REV—RATE 16 H_TCH傳輸率 REV—TIMING 2 R-TCH TX時序調整 REV—STATUS 一REQ 1 R-TCH狀態訊息要求 REV—N一LONG 7 封包中的長型OFDM符號數量 REV—N一 SHORT 2 封包中的短型OFDM符號數量 REV—POWER 2 R-TCHTX功率調整 總數 58 表格32顯示TCH分集模式指派ie(TCH Div Mode Assignment IE)(FCCH)(表袼 23 中標示為 DivModeAssign)的 格式。此IE係用於配置正向鏈路和反向鏈路MAC PDU。此 IE 的欄位 PwdDivModeAssign 和 RevDivModeAssign 的欄位 組合。Table 31: R-TCH spatial multiplexing mode assignment IE field number role IETYPE 4 0x6 MAC_ID 10 MAC ID assigned to UT REV_OFFSET 12 R_tch shift REV_PREAMBLE 2 R-TCH leading item type REV_RATE 16 H_TCH transmission rate REV_TIMING 2 R-TCH TX timing adjustment REV_STATUS_REQ 1 R-TCH status message request REV_N_LONG 7 Number of long OFDM symbols in the packet REV_N_SHORT 2 Short in the packet Number of type OFDM symbols REV-POWER 2 Total number of R-TCHTX power adjustments 58 Table 32 shows the format of TCH Div Mode Assignment IE (FCCH) (labeled DivModeAssign in Table 袼 23). This IE is used to configure forward link and reverse link MAC PDUs. This IE field combination of fields PwdDivModeAssign and RevDivModeAssign.

表格32 : TCH分集模式指派IE 欄位 位元數 作用 IE—TYPE 4 0x7 MAC 一ID 10 指派給UT的MAC ID FWD 一 OFFSET 12 fch位移 FWD 一PREAMBLE 2 F_TCH前導項類型 FWD—RATE 4 F-TCH傳輸率 FWD—N—LONG 7 封包中的長型OFDM符號數量 FWD—N一 SHORT 2 封包中的短型OFDM符號數量 REV一 OFFSET 12 R-TCH位移 REV一 PREAMBLE 2 H-TCH前導項類型 REV—RATE 4 ITCH傳輸率 REV—TIMING 2 R/TCHTX時序調整 REV一 STATUS 一REQ 1 R-TCH狀態訊息要求 REV一N一LONG 7 封包中的長型OFDM符號數量 96870.doc •83 - 200525375 REV—N一 SHORT 2 封包中的短型OFDM符號數量 REV—POWER 2 R-TCH TX功率調整 總數 73 表格33顯示TCH空間多工模式指派ie(TCH Spatial MulTable 32: TCH diversity mode assignment IE field number function IE_TYPE 4 0x7 MAC_ID 10 MAC ID assigned to UT FWD_OFFSET 12 fch shift FWD_PREAMBLE 2 F_TCH Leading item type FWD_RATE 4 F-TCH Transmission rate FWD_N_LONG 7 Number of long OFDM symbols in the packet FWD_N_SHORT 2 Number of short OFDM symbols in the packet REV_OFFSET 12 R-TCH shift REV_PREAMBLE 2 H-TCH leading item type REV_ RATE 4 ITCH transmission rate REV_TIMING 2 R / TCHTX timing adjustment REV_STATUS_REQ 1 R-TCH status message request REV_N_LONG 7 Number of long OFDM symbols in the packet 96870.doc • 83-200525375 REV_N Number of short OFDM symbols in a SHORT 2 packet REV-POWER 2 R-TCH TX total power adjustment 73 Table 33 shows TCH Spatial Mul mode assignment ie (TCH Spatial Mul

Mode Assignment IE)(FCCH)(表格 23 中標示為 SpaModeAssign) 的格式。此IE的欄位類似於DivModeAssign,惟使用空間多 工(而不是使用分集)除外。Mode Assignment IE) (FCCH) (labeled SpaModeAssign in Table 23). This IE field is similar to DivModeAssign except that it uses spatial multiplexing instead of diversity.

表格33 : TCH空間多工模式指派IE 欄位 位元數 作用 IE—Type 4 0x8 MAC—ID 10 指派給UT的MAC ID FWD一 OFFSET 12 FCH位移 FWD 一RATE 16 F-TCH傳輸率 FWD—PREAMBLE 2 F-TCH前導項類型 FWD 一N一 LONG 7 封包中的長型OFDM符號數量 FWD—N—SHORT 2 封包中的短型OFDM符號數量 REV—OFFSET 12 R-TCH位移 REV—PREAMBLE 2 R-TCH前導項類型 REV—RATE 16 R-TCH傳輸率 REV—TIMING 2 R-TCHTX時序調整 REV—STATUS—REQ 1 R-TCH狀態訊息要求 REV__N—LONG 7 封包中的長型OFDM符號數量 REV一N—SHORT 2 封包中的短型OFDM符號數量 REV—POWER 2 R-TCHTX功率調整 總數 97 表格34顯示緩衝器和鏈路狀態要求IE(Buffer and LinkTable 33: Number of IE fields assigned in TCH spatial multiplexing mode IE_Type 4 0x8 MAC_ID 10 MAC ID assigned to UT FWD_OFFSET 12 FCH shift FWD_RATE 16 F-TCH transmission rate FWD_PREAMBLE 2 F-TCH preamble entry type FWD_N_LONG 7 Number of long OFDM symbols in the packet FWD_N_SHORT 2 Number of short OFDM symbols in the packet REV_OFFSET 12 R-TCH shift REV_PREAMBLE 2 R-TCH preamble Item type REV_RATE 16 R-TCH transmission rate REV_TIMING 2 R-TCHTX timing adjustment REV_STATUS_REQ 1 R-TCH status message request REV__N_LONG 7 Number of long OFDM symbols in the packet REV_N_SHORT 2 Number of short OFDM symbols in the packet REV-POWER 2 Total number of R-TCHTX power adjustments 97 Table 34 shows the buffer and link status requirements IE (Buffer and Link

Status Request IE)(RFCH 或 FCCH)(表格 23 中標示為 LinkStatusReq)的格式。AP使用此IE來向UT向要求目前的 緩衝器狀態及連至該UT之實體鏈路的目前狀態。會配合該 要求進行一用於提供回應的反向鏈路配置。除了類型及 MAC ID欄位以外,該反向鏈路配置還包括類型於上文所述 96870.doc -84- 200525375 之反向鏈路配置的欄位。Status Request IE) (RFCH or FCCH) (labeled LinkStatusReq in Table 23). The AP uses this IE to request the current status of the buffer and the current status of the physical link connected to the UT from the UT. A reverse link configuration to provide a response is coordinated with this requirement. In addition to the type and MAC ID fields, the reverse link configuration also includes fields of the reverse link configuration of type 96870.doc -84- 200525375 described above.

表格34 : R-TCH鏈路狀態要求IE 搁位 位元數 作用 IE Type 4 0x9 MAC 一ID 10 指派給UT的MAC ID REV—OFFSET 12 R,tch位移 REV—PREAMBLE 2 R-TCH前導項類型 REV一 TIMING 2 R-TCHTX時序調整 REV_STATUS 一REQ 1 R-TCH狀態訊息要求 REV—N一LONG 7 鏈路狀態封包中的長型OFDM符號數量 REV一N—SHORT 2 鏈路狀憊封包中的短型OFDM符號數量 總數 40 表格35顯示校準要求認可IE(Calibration RequestTable 34: R-TCH link status requirements IE number of bits role IE Type 4 0x9 MAC_ID 10 MAC ID assigned to UT REV_OFFSET 12 R, tch shift REV_PREAMBLE 2 R-TCH leading item type REV -Timing 2 R-TCHTX timing adjustment REV_STATUS-REQ 1 R-TCH status message request REV_N_LONG 7 Number of long OFDM symbols in the link state packet Total number of OFDM symbols 40 Table 35 shows the calibration request approval IE (Calibration Request

Acknowledgment IE)(FCCH)(表格 23 中標示為 CalRequestAck) 的格式。傳輸此IE來認可一 UT的校準要求。通常會在註冊 之後立即執行校準,並且之後極少會執行校準。雖然TDD 無線頻道屬於對稱式,但是位於AP與UT處的傳輸鏈和接收 鏈可具有不相等的增益及相位。執行校準是為了排除此項不 對稱。此IE包括一類型欄位、一 MAC ID攔位(包含指派給UT 的臨時MAC ID)、UT的天線數量以及所要之校準類型的認 可。4位元之校準類型欄位指定用於校準的音頻組合’以及 基於校準用途所傳送之訓練符號(training symbol)的數量。Acknowledgment IE) (FCCH) (labeled CalRequestAck in Table 23). This IE is transmitted to recognize the calibration requirements of a UT. Calibration is usually performed immediately after registration, and rarely afterwards. Although the TDD radio channel is symmetrical, the transmission and reception chains at the AP and UT may have unequal gains and phases. Calibration is performed to eliminate this asymmetry. This IE includes a type field, a MAC ID block (including the temporary MAC ID assigned to the UT), the number of antennas in the UT, and approval of the desired calibration type. The 4-bit calibration type field specifies the audio combination used for calibration 'and the number of training symbols transmitted based on the calibration purpose.

表格35 :校準要求認可IE 參數名稱 位元數 用途 IEType 4 OxA MAC ID 10 指派給UT的臨時MAC ID Nant 2 UT天線數量 CalType 4 認可所要求之校準程序 訊息長度 20 96870.doc -85- 200525375 表格36顯示校準要求拒絕iE(Calibration Request Reject IE)(FCCH)(表格23中標示為CalRequestRej)的格式。此IE拒 絕來自一UT的校準要求。此IE包括類型欄位、MAC ID欄位 及校準要求類型欄位,如同CalRequestAck。此外,還會提 供一原因欄位,用以說明拒絕校準要求的原因。Table 35: Calibration requirements approved IE Parameter name Number of bits Use IEType 4 OxA MAC ID 10 Temporary MAC ID assigned to UT Nant 2 Number of UT antennas CalType 4 Calibration procedure required for accreditation Message length 20 96870.doc -85- 200525375 Form 36 shows the format of Calibration Request Reject IE (FCCH) (labeled CalRequestRej in Table 23). This IE rejects calibration requests from a UT. This IE includes a type field, a MAC ID field, and a calibration request type field, like CalRequestAck. In addition, a reason field is provided to explain why the calibration request was rejected.

表格36 :校準要求拒絕IE 參數名稱 位元數 用途 IEType 4 OxB MAC ID 10 指派給UT的臨時MAC ID CalType 4 所要求的校準程序 Reason 4 拒絕校準要求的原因 訊息長度 22 藉由原因值來參照一校準要求的原因。表格37中詳列原 因及原因值。 _参格37 :原因值意義 值 原因 0000 不需要校準 0001 不支援所要求的程序 0010 校準程序逾時 0011-1111 保留 表格38顯示要求訊息(Request Mess age) (ARCH)的格式。 在起始存取時,該要求訊息被視為一註冊要求。存取方UT 會從設置用於起始存取且在BCCH訊息中發佈的一組ID集 合中隨機挑選一存取ID。如果連續接收到該要求訊息,則 AP會在RFCH上使用註冊要求認可ιέ來認可該要求訊息,並 且指派一臨時MAC ID給該UT。 96870.doc -86- 200525375 已註冊之UT會在ARCH上使用相同的訊息,但是使用在 存取ID欄位中指派的MAC ID來要求服務。如果連續接收到 該要求訊息,則AP會傳輸一 R-TCH鏈路狀態要求IE,藉以 獲得有關該UT所想要之配置的類型及大小。 表格38 : ARCH要求訊息 搁位 位元數 作用 前導項 變數 短型或長型 SLOT—ID 5 UT存取RCH所使用的時槽ID ACCESS 一 ID 10 UT使用的存取ID 總數 15 熟習此項技術者應明白,可使用各種不同術語或技術的 任一種來代表資訊及信號。例如,資料、指令、命令、資 訊、信號、位元、符號及晶片有利於以電壓、電流、電磁 波、磁場或粒子、光場或粒子、或其任何組合來表示。 熟習此項技術者應進一步明白,配合本文所發表之具體 實施例說明的各種圖解邏輯方塊、模組、電路及演算法步 驟可實施為電子硬體、電腦軟體或其組合。為了清楚解說 硬體與軟體的互換性,前文中已就功能而論作廣泛說明各 種圖解的組件、區塊、模組、電路及步驟。視特定應用及 影響整個系統的設計限制條件而定,將功能實施成硬體或 軟體。熟悉本技藝者可以用每種特別應用的不同方法來實 施所述的功能,但這種實施決定不能視為背離本發明之範 圍 可使用一般用途處理器、數位信號處理器(DSP)、專用積 體電路(ASIC)、場可程式規劃閘極陣列(FPGA)或其他可程 96870.doc -87- 200525375 式規劃邏輯裝置(PLD)、離散閘極或電晶體邏輯、離散硬體 組件或其任何的組合以執行本文所說明的功能,以實施或 執行配合本文所發表之具體實施例說明的各種圖解邏輯方 塊、模組及電路。一般用途處理器可能是微處理器,但是 在替代方案中,處理器可能是任何傳統處理器、控制器、 微控制器或狀態機器。處理器可實施為電腦裝置的組合, 例如DSP和微處理器的組合、複數個微處理器、連接:卯 核心的一個或一㈣上微處理$或任何其他此類的組態。 配合本文中揭示之具體實施例中說明的方法或演算法步 驟可直接用硬體、處理器執行的軟體模組或軟硬體組合具 體化。軟體模組可駐存於RAM記憶體、快閃記憶體、r〇m 記憶體、EPROM記憶體、EEPROM記憶體、暫存器、硬碟、 可抽取磁碟、CD-ROM、或此項技術所熟知之任何其他形 式的儲存媒體中。一種示範性儲存媒體係耦合處理器,以 致於處理器可自儲存媒體中讀取資訊,以及寫人資訊到健 存媒體。在替代方帛中,料媒體可被整合至處理器中。 處理器和儲存媒體可駐存在ASIC中。該ASIC可存在於一使 用者終端機中。在替代方案中,處理器和儲存媒體可當作 散離組件駐存在使用者終端機中。 本文中所列出的標題係供參考並且辅助找出各段落。這 些標題非用以限制本文中所說明之觀念的範疇。這些觀念 可在整份說明書中具有適用性。 別文中提供所揭示具體實施例的說明,讓熟習此項技術 者可運用或利用本發明。熟習此項技術者應明白這些具體 96870.doc -88- 200525375 實施例的各種修改,並且本文中定義的 其他具體實施例, 一般原理可適用於Table 36: Calibration Request Rejection IE Parameter Name Number of Bits Purpose IEType 4 OxB MAC ID 10 Temporary MAC ID assigned to UT CalType 4 Required Calibration Procedure Reason 4 Reason for Rejecting Calibration Request Message Length 22 Refer to a Cause Value Reason for calibration requirement. Table 37 details the causes and cause values. _Parameter 37: Cause Value Meaning Value Cause 0000 Calibration not required 0001 The required procedure is not supported 0010 Calibration procedure timeout 0011-1111 Reserved Table 38 shows the format of the Request Mess age (ARCH). Upon initial access, the request message is treated as a registration request. The accessing UT will randomly select an access ID from a set of IDs set for initial access and published in the BCCH message. If the request message is continuously received, the AP will use the registration request approval process on the RFCH to recognize the request message and assign a temporary MAC ID to the UT. 96870.doc -86- 200525375 Registered UTs will use the same message on ARCH, but use the MAC ID assigned in the Access ID field to request service. If the request message is received continuously, the AP will transmit an R-TCH link status request IE to obtain the type and size of the desired configuration of the UT. Table 38: ARCH requires the number of message slots to be used as the leading variable. Short or long SLOT-ID 5 UT time slot ID used by UT to access the RCH. It should be understood that any of a variety of different terms or techniques may be used to represent information and signals. For example, data, instructions, commands, information, signals, bits, symbols, and chips are useful for representing voltage, current, electromagnetic waves, magnetic fields or particles, light fields or particles, or any combination thereof. Those skilled in the art should further understand that the various illustrated logical blocks, modules, circuits, and algorithm steps described in conjunction with the specific embodiments published herein can be implemented as electronic hardware, computer software, or a combination thereof. In order to clearly explain the interchangeability of hardware and software, in the previous article, various components, blocks, modules, circuits, and steps of various diagrams have been extensively explained in terms of functions. Depending on the specific application and design constraints affecting the entire system, the functionality is implemented as hardware or software. Those skilled in the art can implement the described functions in different ways for each particular application, but this implementation decision cannot be regarded as departing from the scope of the present invention. A general-purpose processor, digital signal processor (DSP), Circuit (ASIC), field programmable gate array (FPGA), or other programmable logic device (67070.doc -87- 200525375), discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any of them Combination to perform the functions described herein, to implement or execute the various illustrated logical blocks, modules, and circuits described in conjunction with the specific embodiments published herein. A general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor, but in the alternative, the processor may be any conventional processor, controller, microcontroller, or state machine. A processor may be implemented as a combination of computer devices, such as a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, a plurality of microprocessors, a microprocessor $ connected to one or a core of the core, or any other such configuration. In conjunction with the method or algorithm steps described in the specific embodiments disclosed herein, it can be directly embodied by hardware, a software module executed by a processor, or a combination of software and hardware. Software modules can reside in RAM memory, flash memory, ROM memory, EPROM memory, EEPROM memory, scratchpad, hard disk, removable disk, CD-ROM, or this technology In any other form of storage medium known. An exemplary storage medium is coupled to a processor so that the processor can read information from the storage medium and write information to the storage medium. In the alternative, the media can be integrated into the processor. The processor and the storage medium may reside in an ASIC. The ASIC may reside in a user terminal. In the alternative, the processor and the storage medium may reside as discrete components in a user terminal. The headings listed in this article are for reference and to help find the paragraphs. These headings are not intended to limit the scope of the concepts described in this article. These concepts can be applied throughout the specification. Descriptions of the specific embodiments disclosed are provided elsewhere so that those skilled in the art may utilize or utilize the invention. Those skilled in the art should understand the various modifications of these specific 96870.doc -88- 200525375 embodiments, and other specific embodiments defined herein, the general principles can be applied to

文中所說明的原理及新穎功能一致的最廣泛的範綠 【圖式簡單說明】 & % 本發明不受限於本文中提出的具體實施例,The most extensive Fan Lun with the same principles and novel functions as explained in the text

圖2繪示無線通信裝置的示範性具體實施例,該無線通作 裝置可被組態成一存取點或使用者終端機; 圖3繪示示範性子網路協定堆集; 圖4繪示通過協定堆集各層行進之使用者資料封包· 圖5繪示示範性MAC訊框; 圖6繪示傳輸正向鏈路訊息傳送之示範性方法; 圖7繪示接收正向鏈路訊息傳送之示範性方法; 圖8繪示傳輸反向鏈路訊息傳送之示範性方法; 圖9繪示接收反向鏈路訊息傳送之示範性方法; 圖10繪示UT執行起始存取及註冊之示範性方法; 圖11繪示AP執行起始存取及註冊之示範性方法; 圖12繪示AP使用者資料流之示範性方法丨2〇〇 ; 圖13繪示UT使用者資料流之示範性方法13〇〇 ; 圖14繪示併入實體層反饋至調節層功能中之示範性方 圖15繪示執行調節層多點播送之示範性方法; 圖16繪示決定是否使用調節層多點播送或使用MAC多點 96870.doc -89- 200525375 播送之示範性方法; 圖17緣示響應實體層反饋而執行分割(Segmentation)之 示範性方法; 圖18緣示響應傳輸率而分割片段(segmenting); 圖19繪示在單一MAC訊框中傳輸多資料流及命令之示範 性方法; 圖20繪示連續MAC訊框,包括傳輸各種局部MUX PDU之 實例; 圖21繪示使用MUX指標來準備MAC訊框之示範性方法; 圖22繪示接收包含MUX指標之MAC訊框之示範性方法; 圖23繪示示範性MUXPDU格式; 圖24繪示經組態適用於乙太網路調節之示範性系統; 圖25繪示經組態適用於IP調節之示範性系統; 圖26繪示示範性乙太網路協定堆集;以及 圖27繪示示範性IP協定堆集。 【主要元件符號說明】 100 系統 102 網路 104 存取點(AP) 106A-N 使用者終端機(UT) 1 10, 270 連接 120 無線區域網路區域(WLAN)(圖1) 120 RF鏈路(圖26) 210 收發器 96870.doc -90- 200525375 220 MAC處理器 240 LAN收發器(圖2) 250A-N 天線 255 記憶體 260 資料流 280 反饋 300 子網路協定堆集(圖3) 310A,310B 調節層 312 分割和重組(SAR) 314 資料流分類 316 多點播送映射 320A,320B 資料鏈路層 240A, 240B 實體層(PHY) 320 資料鏈路控制層(圖3) 330 邏輯鏈路(LL)層 332 無障礙式廣播/多點播送/單點播送 334 否定認可 336 認可 340 無線電鏈路控制(RLC)層 342 無線電資源控制(RRC) 344 關聯控制功能 350 系統組態控制 360 MUX功能 370 共同MAC功能 96870.doc -91- 200525375 372 MAC組訊框功能 374 控制頻道功能 376 MAC排程器 378 隨機存取控制功能 380 層管理員 382 QoS管理員功能 384 許可控制功能 386 實體層管理員 410 使用者資料封包 420A_N 片段 430 調節子層PDU 434, 444, 454 封包承載(payload) 440 邏輯鏈路子層PDU(LL PDU) 442 LL標頭 450 MUX子層 PDU(MPDU) 452 MUX標頭 462 MUX指標 464 局部MPDU 466 新PDU 466A MPDU 468 局部MUX PDU 500 MAC訊框 510 廣播頻道(BCH) 520 控制頻道(CCH) 96870.doc -92- 200525375 530 正向流量頻道(F-TCH) 540 反向流量頻道(F-TCH) 550 隨機存取頻道(RCH) 560 片段 2410 IP路由器 2610, 2710 較上層 2615, 2720A IP層 2620A 乙太網路MAC層 2620B 乙太網路MAC 2640 乙太網路調節協定堆集(UT協定堆集) 2650 乙太網路調節協定堆集(AP協定堆集) 2740 IP調節協定堆集(UT協定堆集) 2750 IP調節協定堆集(AP協定堆集) 96870.doc 93-FIG. 2 illustrates an exemplary embodiment of a wireless communication device, and the wireless communication device can be configured as an access point or a user terminal; FIG. 3 illustrates an exemplary subnet protocol stack; FIG. 4 illustrates a pass protocol Stacks of user data packets traveling at various layers. Figure 5 shows an exemplary MAC frame. Figure 6 shows an exemplary method of transmitting forward link message transmission. Figure 7 shows an exemplary method of receiving forward link message transmission. Figure 8 illustrates an exemplary method of transmitting reverse link message transmission; Figure 9 illustrates an exemplary method of receiving reverse link message transmission; Figure 10 illustrates an exemplary method of UT performing initial access and registration; FIG. 11 shows an exemplary method for the AP to perform initial access and registration; FIG. 12 shows an exemplary method for the AP user data stream; 200; FIG. 13 shows an exemplary method for the UT user data stream. 〇; Figure 14 shows an exemplary method of incorporating physical layer feedback into the adjustment layer function. Figure 15 shows an exemplary method of performing adjustment layer multicast. Figure 16 shows the decision whether to use adjustment layer multicast or MAC. Multipoint 96870.doc -89- 200525375 Broadcast Exemplary method; FIG. 17 illustrates an exemplary method of performing segmentation in response to feedback from the physical layer; FIG. 18 illustrates segmentation in response to a transmission rate; FIG. 19 illustrates transmission of multiple data in a single MAC frame Exemplary method of flow and command; FIG. 20 illustrates a continuous MAC frame including an example of transmitting various local MUX PDUs; FIG. 21 illustrates an exemplary method of preparing a MAC frame using a MUX indicator; FIG. 22 illustrates reception including MUX Exemplary method of MAC frame of the indicator; Fig. 23 illustrates an exemplary MUXPDU format; Fig. 24 illustrates an exemplary system configured for Ethernet regulation; Fig. 25 illustrates an exemplary system configured for IP regulation Exemplary system; FIG. 26 illustrates an exemplary Ethernet protocol stack; and FIG. 27 illustrates an exemplary IP protocol stack. [Description of main component symbols] 100 system 102 network 104 access point (AP) 106A-N user terminal (UT) 1 10, 270 connection 120 wireless LAN area (WLAN) (Figure 1) 120 RF link (Figure 26) 210 transceiver 96870.doc -90- 200525375 220 MAC processor 240 LAN transceiver (Figure 2) 250A-N antenna 255 memory 260 data stream 280 feedback 300 subnet protocol stack (Figure 3) 310A, 310B Adjustment Layer 312 Segmentation and Reassembly (SAR) 314 Data Stream Classification 316 Multicast Map 320A, 320B Data Link Layer 240A, 240B Physical Layer (PHY) 320 Data Link Control Layer (Figure 3) 330 Logical Link (LL ) Layer 332 Accessible Broadcast / Multicast / Unicast 334 Negative Approval 336 Approval 340 Radio Link Control (RLC) Layer 342 Radio Resource Control (RRC) 344 Association Control Function 350 System Configuration Control 360 MUX Function 370 Common MAC function 96870.doc -91- 200525375 372 MAC group frame function 374 Control channel function 376 MAC scheduler 378 Random access control function 380 Layer administrator 382 QoS administrator function 384 Admission control function 3 86 Physical layer administrator 410 User data packet 420A_N Fragment 430 Adjust sub-layer PDU 434, 444, 454 Packet payload (payload) 440 Logical link sub-layer PDU (LL PDU) 442 LL header 450 MUX sub-layer PDU (MPDU) 452 MUX header 462 MUX indicator 464 Local MPDU 466 New PDU 466A MPDU 468 Local MUX PDU 500 MAC frame 510 Broadcast channel (BCH) 520 Control channel (CCH) 96870.doc -92- 200525375 530 Forward traffic channel (F-TCH ) 540 Reverse Traffic Channel (F-TCH) 550 Random Access Channel (RCH) 560 Fragment 2410 IP router 2610, 2710 Upper layers 2615, 2720A IP layer 2620A Ethernet MAC layer 2620B Ethernet MAC 2640 Ethernet Network Tuning Protocol Stack (UT Protocol Stack) 2650 Ethernet Tuning Protocol Stack (AP Protocol Stack) 2740 IP Tuning Protocol Stack (UT Protocol Stack) 2750 IP Tuning Protocol Stack (AP Protocol Stack) 96870.doc 93-

Claims (1)

200525375 十、申請專利範圍: 1 · 一種設備,包括: 一第一層,用於接收來自一或多個資料流之一或多個 封包,以及用於從該等一或多個封包來產生一或多個第 一層協定資料單元PDU。 2.如請求項1之設備,進一步包括一第二層,用於接收來自 該第一層之該等一或多個第一層PDU,並且從該等一或多 個第一層PDU來產生一或多個第二層pDU。 3·如請求項2之設備,進一步包括一第三層,用於接收該等 -或多個第二層PDU,並且傳輸該等一或多個第二層咖 至一遠端站台。 4. 5. 6. 如睛求項2之設備’進一步包括一層管理員,用於接收第 二層反饋,並幻專遞該第二層反饋至該第一層。 如請求項3之設備,進一步包括一層管理員,用於接收第 三層反饋,並且傳遞該第三層反饋至該第一層。 月求員3之.又備’進-步包括一層管理員,用於接收第 三層反H ’並且«該第三層反饋至該第二層。 如π求項1之&備’其中該等第_層PDU被產生以響應實 體層反饋。 & 士 %求項5之&備’其中該等第一層P而被產生以響應實 體層反饋。 9·如請求項8之設備,其中該眘興旺cA 3日μ _ _ # τ 4貫體層反饋包括相關聯於該傳 輸的一或多個參數。 1〇· —協定堆集,包括: 96870.doc 200525375 一第一層,包括: 第一邏輯,用於檢查來自— 頭以及響應該等檢查後之 /夕個封包的較高層襟 或多個資料流。 、而分類該等封包成為〜 11 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. •如請求項10之協定堆集,進一 + 該輩P八相々u ^ '匕括用於多點播送映身十 邊寺已分類之封包的第二邏輯。 听射 ,如請求項11項之協定堆集,其 c ^ , W亥苐一邏輯接收實 反饋,並且多點播送映射該等 …貫體層 體層反饋。 刀類之封包以響應該實 如請求項10之協定堆集,進一 % ^ 4 _ 乂包括用於分割該等已分 頒之封包的第二邏輯。 如請求項13項之協定堆集,兑 反㉟” ,、中该第二邏輯接收實體層 ,〇 ^ . 、封包以響應該實體層反饋。 如#求項10之協定堆集,進一牛 斗,s 4 I 步包括用於重組該等已分 類之封包的第二邏輯。 刀 如請求項10之協定堆集,進一 ^ p v 進步包括用於實體層傳輸該 寻已/刀類之封包的第二邏輯。 一種設備,包括: 、勺σ續層’用於接收來自—或多個資料流之一或多個 以及用於從該等一或多個封包來產生—或多個調 曰協定貪料單儿PDU,以響應實體層反饋; 、貝料鏈路控制層,用於接收來自該調節層之該等一 或夕個调節層PDU,並且從該等一或多個調節層Pdu來產 生—或多個實體層PDU ; 96870.doc 200525375 一實體層,用於接收該等一或多個實體層PDU,、 傳輸該等一或多個實體層PDU至一遠端站A,兮& W ° 琢貫體層反 饋包括相關聯於該傳輸的一或多個參數;以及 曰 一層管理員,用於接收該實體層反饋,並 1寻遞該眘 體層反饋至該調節層。 m 19·如請求項17之設備 20.如請求項17之設備 21·如請求項π之設備 22·如請求項17之設備 2 3 ·如睛求項2 2之設備 18·如请求項17之設備,其中該實體層反饋包括一傳輪率 ,其中該實體層反饋包括傳輪:率 其中該實體層反饋包括一調變格式。 其中該實體層反饋包括一封包大小。 其中該實體層執行空間處理。 其中該實體層執行空間多工。 24.=請求項22之設備,其中該實體層執行空間時間傳輪分 25·如請求項22之設備 26.如請求項22之設備 2 7 ·如晴求項2 2之設備 28·如請求項22之設備 其中該實體層執行波束操控。 其中該實體層包括正交分頻多工。 其中該實體層包括分碼多工。 天续,、 纟中該實體層包括兩個或兩個以上 、並且執多重輸入多重輸出處理。 29·如請求項17之設備’其中 行資料流分類。 ^體層反饋來執 30.如請求項17之設備, 桩跄少4 周即層可调郎,藉以分割一 接收之封包成為複數個片段 該等片段的大小。 胃應/貫體層反饋來決定 -求項30之設備,其中該片段大小與傳輸率成正比。 96870.doc 200525375 32.如請求項17之設備,其中該調節層執行多點播送映射— 或多個已接收之封包,以響應該實體層反饋。 33·如請求項32之設備,其中該調節層包括·· 第一電路,其可運作以映射一多點播送封包至一單一 第-調節層PDU,用以傳輸至兩個或兩個以上遠端站台; 第二電路,其可運作以映射一多點播送封包至兩個或 兩個以上第二調節層PDU,用以傳輸至該等兩個或兩個以 上遠端站台; 第三電路’其可運作以計算相關聯於該第—調節層 PDU的一第一傳輸度量以及相關聯於該等第二調節層 PDU的-第二傳輸度量,該等傳輸度量被計算以響鹿和多 個頻道相關的實體層反饋,該等頻道相對應於多個遠端 站台; 曰-比較器',用於比較該第—傳輸度量與該第二傳輸度 量’以產生一度量比較結果;以及 個或兩個以上遠端站台之單_頻道的可支援傳輸率,以 及該第二傳輸度量是-來自該等兩個或兩個以上頻道之 一的可支援傳輸率。 -選擇器,用於響應該度量比較結果,而藉由選擇第 -或第二調節層_來產生一或多個輸出調節層pDu。 34.如請求項33之設備,其中該第一傳輪度量是一至該等兩 K如請求項33之設備’其中該第—傳輸度量及該第二傳输 度量分別是至該等兩個或兩個以上遠端站台之該單一頻 道所使用的容量’以及至該等兩個或兩個以上遠端站台 96870.doc 200525375 之該等兩個或兩個以上頻道所使用的容量。 36·如請求項34之設備,其中當該度量比較結果指示出該第 一調節層PDU所使用的容量小於該第二調節層pDU所使 用的容量時,則選擇該第一調節層pDU ;否則選擇該等第 二調節層PDU。 3 7. —種無線通信系統,包括·· 一第一層,用於接收來自一或多個資料流之一或多個 封包,以及用於從該等一或多個封包來產生一或多個第 一層協定資料單元PDU。 38. 如請求項37之無線通信系統,進一步包括一第二層,用 於接收來自s亥第-層之該等一或多個第一層pDu,並且從 該等一或多個第-層PDU來產生一或多個第二層聊。 39. 如請求項38之無線通信系統,進一步包括一第三層,用 於接收該等一或多個第二層聊,並且傳輸該等一或多個 第二層PDU至一遠端站台。 40. 如請求項38之無線通信系統,進一步包括一層管理員, 用於接收第二層反饋,並且傳遞該第二層反饋至該第一 層0 41. 如請求項39之無線通信系統,進__步包括—層管理員 用於接收第三層反饋’並且傳遞該第三層反饋至該第 層0 一層PDU被產生 42·如請求項37之無線通信系統,其中該等第 以響應實體層反饋。 43· —種無線通信系統,包括·· 96870.doc 200525375 一調節層,詩接收來自-或多個資料流之-或多個 封包,以及用於從該等-或多個封包來產生—或多個調 節層協定資料單元PDU,以響應實體層反饋; -資料鏈路控制層’用於接收來自該調;層之該等一 或多個調節層刚,並且從該等—或多個調節層刚來產 生一或多個實體層PDU ; 該實體層反饋包括相關聯於該傳輸的一或多個參 一實體層,用於接收該等-或多個實體層刚,並且 將該等-或多個實體層PDU從—第—站台傳輸至一遠端 站 數;以及 一層管理員,用於接收該實體層反饋,並且傳遞該實 體層反饋至該調節層。 44· 一種方法,包括·· 接收來自一或多個資料流之一或多個封包;以及 從該等一或多個封包來產生一或多個第一層pDU。 45. 如#求項44之方法,進一步包括從該等一或多個第一層 PDU來產生一或多個第二層Pdu。 46. 如請求項45之方法,進一步包括傳輸該等一或多個第二 層PDU至一遠端站台。 47. 如請求項44之方法,其中該等第—層pDU被產生以響應實 體層反饋。 4 8 · —種媒體存取控制方法,包括: 接收末自一或多個資料流的一或多個封包; 從邊等一或多個封包來產生一或多個調節層pDU,以 96870.doc 200525375 響應實體層反饋; 從該等一或多個調節層PDU來產生一或多個實體層 PDU ;以及 、 9 傳輸該等一或多個實體層PDU至一遠端站台。 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 如請求項48之方法,其中該傳輸包括按照一傳輸率之空 間處理’該傳輸率相關聯於該實體層反饋。 如睛求項48之方法,進一步包括執行資料流分類以響應 孩貫體層反饋,以便產生一或多個調節層pDu。 如請j項48之方法,進一步包括分割一接收之封包以響 應該實體層反饋,以便產生一或多個調節層pDu。 :睛求項51之方法,進一步包括選擇一用於該分割的片 段大小,以響應實體層反饋。 如:求項52之方法,其中該片段大小與一傳輸率成正比。 如睛求項48之方法,進一步包括多點播送映射一封包至 兩個或兩個以上頻道,以響應該實體層反饋。 士明求項54之方法,其中該等兩個或兩個以上頻道中— 或多個頻道是單點播送頻道。 如請求項48之方法,進-步包括在—第—模式中多點播 :映射至-單一頻道’以及在一第二模式中多點播送映 射至兩個或兩個以上頻道。 女哨求項56之方法,進一步包括當多點播送映射至一 :頻道所需的系統資源少於多點播送映射至兩個或兩 以上頻道所需的系統資源時,則選擇該第一 選擇該第二模式。 、式’否 96870.doc 200525375 58.如請求項57之方法,甘山 上,及在兩個^會分別相闕聯在一單一頻道 上次在兩個或兩個以 計算該系統資源需求。頻道上傳輸所需的傳輸率,來 59. —種媒體存取控制方法,包括· 接收-被導向至一遠端站台的封包,·以及 段之封包成為兩個或兩個以上片段,該等片 =大小^照_聯於該遠端站台頻道的實體層參 60_ —種媒體存取控制方法,包括·· 接=被定址至—多點播送群組的封包,該多點播送 群,·且^括兩個或兩個以上遠端站台·以及 在兩個或兩個以上頻道上傳輸該封包至該多點播送群 組中的該等遠端站台。 61 -種媒體存取控制方法,包括·· ,接收被疋址至一多點播送群組的封包,該多點播送 群組包括兩個或兩個以上遠端站台; •比較在一單—頻道多點播送傳輸至該多點播送群組所 第貝源配置,與在兩個或兩個以上頻道上多點播 送傳輸至該多點播送群組所f的—第二資源配置;以及 當該第一資源配置少於該第二資源配置時,則在單一 頻道上傳輸該封包;否則在兩個或兩個以上頻道上傳輸 該封包。 月求項61之方法,其中該第一資源配置是該多點播送 群組中每個遠端站台可接收之-頻道的最低可支援傳輸 96870.doc 200525375 :x及忒第一資源配置是該等兩個或兩個以上頻、f 每個頻道的最低傳輸率。 ^ 63.如明求項62之方法,豆中以會# . Y w π體層反饋來接收該篝可± 援傳輸率。 炎 64. 65. —種電腦可讀型媒體’其可運作以執行下列步驟: 接收來自-或多個資料流的一或多個封包;以及 從該等一或多個封包來產生一或多個第一層pdu。 如§月求項64之電腦可讀型媒體,其可運作以執行下列步 驟:從該等-或多個第一層PDU來產生一或多個第二屌 PDU。 9 认如請求項65之電腦可讀型媒體,其可運作以執行下列步 驟:傳輸該等一或多個第二層PDU至-遠端站台。 67.如請求項64之電腦可讀型媒體,其中該產生步驟可運作 以產生-或多個第—層聊,以響應實體層反饋。 队一種電腦可讀型媒體,其可運作以執行下列步驟: 接收來自一或多個資料流的一或多個封包; 亥等或夕個封包來產生一或多個調節層PDU,以 響應實體層反饋; 攸δ亥等一或多個調節層pDU來產生一或多個實體層 PDU ;以及 傳輸該等一或多個實體層PDU至-遠端站台。 69. -種電腦可讀型媒體,其可運作以執行下列步驟: 接收-被導向至—遠端站台的封包;以及 分割該接收之封包成為兩個或兩個以上片段,該等片 96870.doc 200525375 段的大小係按照相關聯於該遠端站台頻道的實體層參 數。 70.種電腦可讀型媒體,其可運作以執行下列步驟·· 接收一被定址至一多點播送群組的封包,該多點播送 群組包括兩個或兩個以上遠端站台;以及 在兩個或兩個以上頻道上傳輸該封包至該多點播送群 組中的該等遠端站台。 71 · —種電腦可讀型媒體,其可運作以執行下列步驟: 接收一被定址至一多點播送群組的封包,該多點播送 群組包括兩個或兩個以上遠端站台,· 比較在一單一頻道多點播送傳輸至該多點播送群組所 品的第 > 源配置,與在兩個或兩個以上頻道上多點播 送傳輸至該多點播送群組所需的一第二資源配置;以及 當该第一資源配置少於該第二資源配置時,則在單一 頻道上傳輸該封包;否則在兩個或兩個以上頻道上傳輸 該封包。 7 2 · —種設備,包括: 用於接收來自一或多個資料流的一或多 放· η 夕似封包之構 用於從該等一或多個封包來產生一或多 之構件。 固第-層咖 73.如請求項72之設備,進一步包括用於從該一 寸 或多個筮 一層PDU來產生一或多個第二層?1)1;之構件。 74·如請求項73之設備,進一步包括用於傳輸哕一 μ f ~或多個 96870.doc •10- 200525375 75 76 苐一層PDU至一遠端站台之構件。 如請求項74之設備,其中該等第一層pDU被產生以響應 體層反饋。200525375 10. Scope of patent application: 1. A device, including: a first layer for receiving one or more packets from one or more data streams, and for generating one or more packets from the one or more packets; Or multiple first layer protocol data unit PDUs. 2. The device of claim 1, further comprising a second layer for receiving the one or more first layer PDUs from the first layer and generating from the one or more first layer PDUs One or more second layer pDUs. 3. The device of claim 2, further comprising a third layer for receiving the-or more second layer PDUs, and transmitting the one or more second layer coffees to a remote station. 4. 5. 6. The device of item 2 further includes a layer of administrators for receiving feedback from the second layer, and magically delivering the second layer of feedback to the first layer. For example, the device of claim 3 further includes a layer of administrators for receiving the feedback of the third layer and transmitting the feedback of the third layer to the first layer.求 求人 3 之. Also prepared ’further includes a layer of administrators for receiving the third layer of anti-H’ and «the third layer is fed back to the second layer. For example, & prepare 'for π Finding Item 1 where the layer PDUs are generated in response to the physical layer feedback. & taxi% seeking item 5 & prepare ' wherein the first layer P is generated in response to the physical layer feedback. 9. The device of claim 8, wherein the Shen Xing cA 3-day μ _ # τ 4 through-body feedback includes one or more parameters associated with the transmission. 1〇 · —Agreement stack, including: 96870.doc 200525375-a first layer, including: a first logic, used to check the upper layer or multiple data streams from the header and the packets after responding to these checks . The classification of these packets becomes ~ 11 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. • If the agreement stack of claim 10 is added, the first + the generation P eight phase 々 ^ '括 bracketing is used for multicast broadcasting The second logic of the classified packets of the Shibian Temple. Listening and shooting, such as the agreement stack of item 11 of the request, its c ^, W Hai 苐 a logic to receive real feedback, and multicast mapping of these ... through the body layer body feedback. The packet of knives responds to the agreement stack of the real request item 10, and further% ^ 4 _ 乂 includes the second logic for splitting the distributed packets. If the agreement stack of item 13 is requested, the second logic receives the entity layer, 0 ^., And a packet in response to the feedback from the entity layer. For example, the #question 10 agreement stack, enter a bullfight, s Step I includes the second logic for reorganizing the classified packets. For example, the protocol stack of claim 10 further advances the pv step to include the second logic for the physical layer to transmit the seek / knife packets. A device comprising: a, a continuation layer for receiving one or more data streams from one or more data streams and for generating one or more packets from the one or more packets; PDUs in response to feedback from the physical layer; and a link control layer for receiving one or more regulatory layer PDUs from the regulatory layer and generating them from the one or more regulatory layers Pdu—or Multiple physical layer PDUs; 96870.doc 200525375 a physical layer for receiving the one or more physical layer PDUs, transmitting the one or more physical layer PDUs to a remote station A, and &W; Cut-through body feedback includes one or more parameters associated with the transmission And a layer of administrators for receiving feedback from the physical layer, and 1 for the feedback from the physical layer to the adjustment layer. M 19 · As requested by the device of item 17 20. As claimed by the device of item 17 ·· as requested Device 22 of item π, such as device 2 of item 17, 2 Device 18 of item 2, 2 18, such as device of item 17, wherein the physical layer feedback includes a transmission rate, and the physical layer feedback includes a transmission rate. Round: rate where the entity layer feedback includes a modulation format. Where the entity layer feedback includes a packet size. Where the entity layer performs spatial processing. Where the entity layer performs spatial multiplexing. 24. = equipment of request item 22, Among them, the entity layer performs space-time round robin 25. If the device of item 22 is requested. 26. If the device of item 22 is requested. 2 7 • If the device of item 22 is requested. 28 If the device of item 22 is requested. Beam steering. The physical layer includes orthogonal frequency division multiplexing. The physical layer includes code division multiplexing. Continuing, the physical layer includes two or more, and performs multiple input multiple output processing. 29 · If Please The device of item 17 is classified as a data stream. ^ Body feedback is used to perform the 30. If the device of item 17 is requested, the layer can be adjusted for less than 4 weeks, so that a received packet is divided into a plurality of fragments. The size should be determined by stomach response / cross-body feedback-the device of item 30, where the fragment size is proportional to the transmission rate. 96870.doc 200525375 32. The device of item 17, wherein the adjustment layer performs multicast mapping— Or multiple received packets in response to the entity layer feedback. 33. The device of claim 32, wherein the adjustment layer comprises: a first circuit operable to map a multicast packet to a single layer-adjustment layer PDU for transmission to two or more remote locations End stations; a second circuit operable to map a multicast packet to two or more second regulatory layer PDUs for transmission to the two or more remote stations; a third circuit ' It is operable to calculate a first transmission metric associated with the first-regulation-layer PDU and a second transmission metric associated with the second-regulation-layer PDU. Channel-related physical layer feedback, these channels correspond to multiple remote stations; said -comparator 'for comparing the first transmission metric with the second transmission metric' to produce a metric comparison result; and or The supportable transmission rate for a single channel of more than two remote stations, and the second transmission metric is-the supportable transmission rate from one of the two or more channels. -A selector for responding to the metric comparison result and generating one or more output adjustment layers pDu by selecting the first or second adjustment layer_. 34. The device of claim 33, wherein the first pass metric is one to the two K's of the device of claim 33, wherein the first transmission metric and the second transmission metric are to the two or The capacity used by the single channel of two or more remote stations' and the capacity used by the two or more channels of the two or more remote stations 96870.doc 200525375. 36. The device of claim 34, wherein when the metric comparison result indicates that the capacity used by the first regulation layer PDU is less than the capacity used by the second regulation layer pDU, the first regulation layer pDU is selected; otherwise The second regulatory layer PDUs are selected. 3 7. A wireless communication system comprising a first layer for receiving one or more packets from one or more data streams and for generating one or more packets from the one or more packets Layer 1 protocol data unit PDU. 38. The wireless communication system of claim 37, further comprising a second layer for receiving the one or more first layer pDus from the first layer or the second layer from the first or second layers. PDU to generate one or more second-level chats. 39. The wireless communication system of claim 38, further comprising a third layer for receiving the one or more second layer chats and transmitting the one or more second layer PDUs to a remote station. 40. The wireless communication system as claimed in item 38, further comprising a layer of administrators for receiving feedback from the second layer and passing the second layer feedback to the first layer 0 41. As the wireless communication system for item 39, enter The __step includes-the layer administrator is used to receive the third layer feedback 'and pass the third layer feedback to the first layer 0. The first layer PDU is generated. 42. The wireless communication system as claimed in item 37, wherein the first response entity is Layer feedback. 43 · —a wireless communication system, including ································································ Multiple adjustment layers agree on data unit PDUs in response to the physical layer feedback;-the data link control layer is used to receive the one or more adjustment layers from the tune; The layer has just generated one or more physical layer PDUs; the physical layer feedback includes one or more parameter physical layers associated with the transmission for receiving the-or more physical layers, and the- Or multiple physical layer PDUs are transmitted from the first station to a remote station; and a layer of administrators is used to receive the physical layer feedback and pass the physical layer feedback to the adjustment layer. 44. A method comprising: receiving one or more packets from one or more data streams; and generating one or more first layer pDUs from the one or more packets. 45. The method of # 求 项 44, further comprising generating one or more second layer Pdus from the one or more first layer PDUs. 46. The method of claim 45, further comprising transmitting the one or more layer 2 PDUs to a remote station. 47. The method of claim 44 wherein the first layer pDUs are generated in response to physical layer feedback. 4 8 · — A media access control method, including: receiving one or more packets from one or more data streams; waiting for one or more packets from the edge to generate one or more adjustment layer pDUs to 96870. doc 200525375 in response to physical layer feedback; generating one or more physical layer PDUs from the one or more conditioning layer PDUs; and, 9 transmitting the one or more physical layer PDUs to a remote station. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. The method of claim 48, wherein the transmission includes space processing according to a transmission rate ' The transmission rate is associated with the physical layer feedback. The method of item 48, further comprising performing data stream classification in response to child-level body feedback in order to generate one or more adjustment layers pDu. For example, the method of item 48 may further include segmenting a received packet in response to physical layer feedback in order to generate one or more adjustment layers pDu. The method of eye-seeking item 51 further includes selecting a segment size for the segmentation in response to physical layer feedback. For example, the method of finding term 52, wherein the fragment size is directly proportional to a transmission rate. The method according to item 48 further includes multicast mapping a packet to two or more channels in response to the entity layer feedback. Shi Ming's method of finding item 54, wherein among the two or more channels-or more channels are unicast channels. As in the method of claim 48, the further steps include multicasting in a first mode: mapping to a single channel 'and multicasting to two or more channels in a second mode. The method of female whistle seeking item 56 further includes selecting the first selection when the system resources required for multicast mapping to one: channel are less than the system resources required for multicast mapping to two or more channels The second mode. , No 96870.doc 200525375 58. If the method of item 57 is requested, Ganshan, and the two ^ will be linked together in a single channel, the last two or two to calculate the system resource requirements. The transmission rate required for transmission on the channel, come 59.-a method of media access control, including:-receiving-a packet directed to a remote station, and a packet of segments into two or more segments, etc. Slice = size ^ 照 _physical layer parameters associated with the remote station channel 60_ — a method of media access control, including access to a packet addressed to a multicast group, the multicast group, In addition, two or more remote stations are included, and the packet is transmitted to the remote stations in the multicast group on two or more channels. 61-A media access control method, including ..., receiving a packet addressed to a multicast group, the multicast group including two or more remote stations; The second resource configuration of the multicast configuration of the channel multicast transmission to the multicast group, and the multicast transmission of the multicast group to two or more channels to the multicast group; and When the first resource configuration is less than the second resource configuration, the packet is transmitted on a single channel; otherwise, the packet is transmitted on two or more channels. The method of finding item 61 in the month, wherein the first resource configuration is the minimum supportable transmission of the channel that can be received by each remote station in the multicast group. 96870.doc 200525375: x Wait for two or more frequencies, f the minimum transmission rate of each channel. ^ 63. If the method of item 62 is explicitly requested, Dou Zhong will receive the body's #. Y w π tomographic feedback to receive the data. Yan 64. 65. A computer-readable medium that is operable to perform the following steps: receiving one or more packets from-or more data streams; and generating one or more packets from the one or more packets First pdu. A computer-readable medium such as § Month Item 64, which is operable to perform the following steps: From the one or more first layer PDUs to generate one or more second frame PDUs. 9 The computer-readable medium of claim 65 is operable to perform the following steps: transmit the one or more layer 2 PDUs to a remote station. 67. The computer-readable medium of claim 64, wherein the generating step is operable to generate one or more first-level chats in response to entity-level feedback. A computer-readable medium that is operable to perform the following steps: receive one or more packets from one or more data streams; wait for one or more packets to generate one or more conditioning layer PDUs in response to an entity Layer feedback; one or more adjustment layer pDUs, such as δ, to generate one or more physical layer PDUs; and transmitting the one or more physical layer PDUs to a remote station. 69.-A computer-readable medium operable to perform the following steps: receiving-a packet directed to-a remote station; and dividing the received packet into two or more fragments, such pieces 96870. The size of the doc 200525375 segment is based on the physical layer parameters associated with the remote station channel. 70. A computer-readable medium operable to perform the following steps: receiving a packet addressed to a multicast group, the multicast group including two or more remote stations; and The packet is transmitted on two or more channels to the remote stations in the multicast group. 71 · —a computer-readable medium operable to perform the following steps: receiving a packet addressed to a multicast group, the multicast group including two or more remote stations, · Compare the > source configuration of a single channel multicast transmission to the multicast group with the one required for multicast transmission to the multicast group on two or more channels A second resource configuration; and when the first resource configuration is less than the second resource configuration, the packet is transmitted on a single channel; otherwise, the packet is transmitted on two or more channels. 7 2 · A device comprising: one or more receivers for receiving from one or more data streams · η packet-like structure for generating one or more components from the one or more packets. Solid layer-layer coffee 73. The device of claim 72, further comprising means for generating one or more second layers from the one-inch or more one-layer PDUs? 1) 1; components. 74. The device of claim 73, further comprising means for transmitting one μf or more 96870.doc • 10-200525375 75 76 one layer of PDUs to a remote station. The device of claim 74, wherein the first layer pDUs are generated in response to body feedback. •一種設備,包括 用於接收來自 件; 或多個貧料流的一或多個封包之構 從該等一或多個封包來產生一 y 郎層PDU來產生一或多個實體• A device comprising a structure for receiving one or more packets from a device; or multiple lean streams From the one or more packets to generate a y Lang layer PDU to generate one or more entities 用於響應實體層反饋而 或多個調節層PDU之構件 用於從該等一或多個調 層PDU之構件;以及 用於傳輸該等一或多個實體層刚至一遠端站 件。 77. 78. 79. 一種設備,包括: 用於接收一被導向至_请★山a / 至遂&站台的封包之構件;以及 用於分割該接收之封包成為 乂局兩個或兩個以上片段之相Means for responding to the physical layer feedback or multiple adjustment layer PDUs means for transmitting from the one or more adjustment layer PDUs; and for transmitting the one or more physical layers to a remote station. 77. 78. 79. A device comprising: a means for receiving a packet directed to _Please ★ 山 a / 到 随 &station; and a means for dividing the received packet into two or two Phases of the above snippets 件’该寺片段的大小待接昭} 八』你钕妝相關聯於該遠端站台頻 實體層參數。 ' ’ 一種設備,包括: 用於接收-被定址至一多點播送群組的封包之構件, 該多點播送群Μ包括兩個或兩個以上遠端站台;以及 用於在兩個或兩個以上頻 須逼上傳輸該封包至該多點播 送群組中的該等遠端站台之構件。 一種設備,包括.· 用於接收一被定址至一多, ”’播送群組的封包之構件, 96870.doc -11- 200525375 該多點播送群組包括兩個或兩個以上遠端站台·, 比較構件,用於比較在一單一頻道多點播送傳輸至該 多點播送群組所需的一第一資源配置,與在兩個或兩個 以上頻道上多點播送傳輸至該多點播送群組所需的一第 二資源配置;以及 傳輸構件,用於當該第一資源配置少於該第二資源配 置時’則在單-頻道上傳輸該封包;否則在兩個或兩個 以上頻道上傳輸該封包。 80· —種無線通信系統,包括: 用於接收來自一或多個資料流的一或多個封包之構 件;以及 用於從該等-或多個封包來產生_或多個第—層咖 之構件。 81.如請求項80之無線通信系統,進—步包括用於從該等一 或多個第-層酬來產生_或多個第二層咖之構件。 82·如請求項81之無線通信系統,進—步包㈣於傳輸 一或多個第二層PDU至一遠端站台之構件。 83.如請求項80之無線通信系統,其中該等第-層PDU被產生 以響應實體層反饋。 8 4. —種無線通信系統,包括: 用於接收來自一或多個資料流 J或多個封包之構 件, 個封包來產生一 用於響應實體層反饋而從該等一或多 或多個調節層PDU之構件; 96870.doc -12- 200525375 用於從該等一或多個調節層PDU來產生一或多個實體 層PDU之構件;以及 用於傳輸該等一或多個實體層PDU至一遠端站台之構 件0 96870.doc -13 -Pieces ’size of the temple fragment to be received} Eighty” your neodymium makeup is associated with the physical parameters of the remote station frequency. '' A device comprising: means for receiving-addressed packets to a multicast group, the multicast group M comprising two or more remote stations; and The multiple frequencies must force the components that transmit the packet to the remote stations in the multicast group. A device comprising: · a component for receiving a packet addressed to more than one "" broadcast group, 96870.doc -11- 200525375 the multicast group includes two or more remote stations · A comparison component for comparing a first resource configuration required for a single channel multicast transmission to the multicast group, and a multicast transmission to the multicast for two or more channels A second resource configuration required by the group; and a transmission component for transmitting the packet on a single-channel when the first resource configuration is less than the second resource configuration; otherwise, two or more than two The packet is transmitted on a channel. 80 ·-a wireless communication system comprising: means for receiving one or more packets from one or more data streams; and for generating _ or- 81. The wireless communication system of claim 80. The wireless communication system of claim 80, further comprising a component for generating one or more second-level coffees from the one or more first-level rewards. 82. A wireless communication system as claimed in item 81 The further steps include components that transmit one or more layer 2 PDUs to a remote station. 83. The wireless communication system of claim 80, wherein the layer 1 PDUs are generated in response to physical layer feedback. 8 4. A wireless communication system comprising: means for receiving from one or more data streams J or more packets, each packet to generate a packet for adjustment from the one or more or more of them in response to physical layer feedback Layer PDU components; 96870.doc -12- 200525375 components for generating one or more physical layer PDUs from the one or more conditioning layer PDUs; and for transmitting the one or more physical layer PDUs to Components of a remote station 0 96870.doc -13-
TW93131486A 2003-10-15 2004-10-15 Wireless lan protocol stack TWI383302B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (10)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US51190403P 2003-10-15 2003-10-15
US51175003P 2003-10-15 2003-10-15
US51323903P 2003-10-21 2003-10-21
US52634703P 2003-12-01 2003-12-01
US52635603P 2003-12-01 2003-12-01
US53279103P 2003-12-23 2003-12-23
US54596304P 2004-02-18 2004-02-18
US57654504P 2004-06-02 2004-06-02
US58684104P 2004-07-08 2004-07-08
US60096004P 2004-08-11 2004-08-11

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW200525375A true TW200525375A (en) 2005-08-01
TWI383302B TWI383302B (en) 2013-01-21

Family

ID=37491830

Family Applications (6)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW93131486A TWI383302B (en) 2003-10-15 2004-10-15 Wireless lan protocol stack
TW93131491A TWI384793B (en) 2003-10-15 2004-10-15 High speed media access control with legacy system interoperability
TW93131485A TWI387279B (en) 2003-10-15 2004-10-15 High speed media access control and direct link protocol
TW93131483A TWI385993B (en) 2003-10-15 2004-10-15 Method, apparatus, and system for medium access control
TW93131484A TWI380633B (en) 2003-10-15 2004-10-15 Method, apparatus, and system for multiplexing protocol data units
TW093131490A TWI466517B (en) 2003-10-15 2004-10-15 High speed media access control

Family Applications After (5)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW93131491A TWI384793B (en) 2003-10-15 2004-10-15 High speed media access control with legacy system interoperability
TW93131485A TWI387279B (en) 2003-10-15 2004-10-15 High speed media access control and direct link protocol
TW93131483A TWI385993B (en) 2003-10-15 2004-10-15 Method, apparatus, and system for medium access control
TW93131484A TWI380633B (en) 2003-10-15 2004-10-15 Method, apparatus, and system for multiplexing protocol data units
TW093131490A TWI466517B (en) 2003-10-15 2004-10-15 High speed media access control

Country Status (3)

Country Link
CN (4) CN101860925B (en)
BR (2) BRPI0415426A (en)
TW (6) TWI383302B (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8897216B2 (en) 2007-02-01 2014-11-25 Intel Corporation Method and apparatus for supporting AMD re-segmentation

Families Citing this family (43)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI465085B (en) * 2006-02-14 2014-12-11 Interdigital Tech Corp Methods and systems for providing reliable multicast service in a wlan service
TWI430636B (en) 2006-04-24 2014-03-11 Interdigital Tech Corp Method and signaling procedure for transmission opportunity usage in a wireless mesh network
CN104917636A (en) * 2006-04-25 2015-09-16 交互数字技术公司 Access point and wireless transmitting/receiving units
KR101424258B1 (en) * 2006-08-23 2014-08-13 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for performing random access procedure in wirelss communication system
US8488508B2 (en) 2006-11-13 2013-07-16 Qualcomm Incorporated Method and apparatus for providing reliable multicast in a wireless communication system
KR20080084533A (en) 2007-03-16 2008-09-19 엘지전자 주식회사 A method of data communication in mobile communication system
US7885220B2 (en) * 2007-08-17 2011-02-08 Intel Corporation Method and apparatus for improved dual channel operation and access point discovery in wireless communication networks
US9113478B2 (en) 2008-08-20 2015-08-18 Qualcomm Incorporated Methods and apparatus for requesting and allocating resources in multiple transmission opportunities
US8989106B2 (en) 2009-02-27 2015-03-24 Qualcomm Incorporated Methods and apparatuses for scheduling uplink request spatial division multiple access (RSDMA) messages in an SDMA capable wireless LAN
TWI420874B (en) * 2009-07-01 2013-12-21 Wistron Corp Information system of actively providing information to electronic devices and method thereof
US10389479B2 (en) * 2010-01-29 2019-08-20 Qualcomm Incorporated Method and apparatus for signaling expansion and backward compatibility preservation in wireless communication systems
CN101917772A (en) * 2010-08-26 2010-12-15 张若南 Media access control method based on double-buffer area mixed type media access control protocol
US8340601B2 (en) * 2010-09-20 2012-12-25 Intel Corporation MU MIMO support with highly directional antennas
WO2012148487A1 (en) * 2011-04-26 2012-11-01 Intel Corporation Methods and arrangements for low power wireless networks
TWI478550B (en) * 2011-06-07 2015-03-21 Htc Corp Method of back-off procedure setup in a wireless communication system
CN103002592B (en) * 2011-09-16 2015-08-19 华为技术有限公司 A kind ofly reclaim reverse method and the device of authorizing middle transmission opportunity control
CN103095364B (en) * 2011-11-01 2016-01-27 华为技术有限公司 Data transferring method and device
KR101851614B1 (en) * 2011-12-12 2018-06-12 삼성전자주식회사 Method of clock control of system on chip including functional block, system on chip of the same and semicondutor system including the same
CN102595648B (en) * 2011-12-31 2015-04-08 重庆邮电大学 Adaptive carrier sense multiple access (CSMA)/conditional access (CA) method based on institute of electrical and electronics engineers (IEEE)802.15.4
CN102802071B (en) * 2012-08-24 2014-10-29 上海广电电子科技有限公司 Intelligent television, mobile terminal, multi-screen interaction system and wireless communication method
US20140105098A1 (en) * 2012-10-16 2014-04-17 Stmicroelectronics, Inc. Frame specification for a wireless network communication
CN104104616B (en) 2013-04-03 2019-04-19 华为技术有限公司 The method, apparatus and system of data dispatch and exchange
JP2016523036A (en) * 2013-05-02 2016-08-04 インターデイジタル パテント ホールディングス インコーポレイテッド Method for selecting entities based on total link quality
US9577811B2 (en) * 2013-05-03 2017-02-21 Qualcomm Incorporated Methods and systems for frequency multiplexed communication in dense wireless environments
US9492741B2 (en) 2013-05-22 2016-11-15 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Wireless gaming protocol
US9936437B2 (en) * 2013-08-12 2018-04-03 Kt Corporation Method and device for transmitting data in WLAN system
CN110190937B (en) 2013-09-29 2021-10-22 华为技术有限公司 Data transmission method and equipment
US9661634B2 (en) * 2013-11-01 2017-05-23 Qualcomm Incorporated Systems and methods for improved communication efficiency in high efficiency wireless networks
CN103916850B (en) * 2014-04-08 2017-02-15 中国科学院微电子研究所 Safe wireless communication method and device
US10045369B2 (en) * 2014-06-09 2018-08-07 Intel IP Corporation Apparatus, method and system of multi-user downlink transmission
CN104410481B (en) * 2014-11-28 2018-01-19 国家电网公司 A kind of setting means based on NTP networks and pair when system
US9693371B2 (en) * 2015-04-10 2017-06-27 Qualcomm Incorporated IoE device transmission signaling and scheduling
CN113365368A (en) * 2015-09-28 2021-09-07 纽瑞科姆有限公司 Apparatus and method for TXOP duration field in PHY header
US10230498B2 (en) 2015-11-13 2019-03-12 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Data acknowledgment to multiple devices
CN108370585B (en) * 2015-12-09 2022-02-01 韦勒斯标准与技术协会公司 Wireless communication method and wireless communication terminal using multiple basic service identifier sets
CN115426088A (en) 2016-03-04 2022-12-02 韦勒斯标准与技术协会公司 Wireless communication method and wireless communication terminal
US10225867B2 (en) * 2016-09-02 2019-03-05 Qualcomm Incorporated Transmission configuration and format for random access messages
US10200874B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2019-02-05 Qualcomm Incorporated Signature sequence for system identification in a shared spectrum
TWI657688B (en) * 2017-11-22 2019-04-21 群登科技股份有限公司 Time division multiplexing channel structure and time division multiplexing communication method using the same
KR20220019664A (en) * 2019-05-10 2022-02-17 인터디지탈 패튼 홀딩스, 인크 Efficient uplink resource request in WLAN system
CN110190873B (en) * 2019-05-30 2022-04-08 磐基技术有限公司 Wired communication method supporting multiple users
TWI729682B (en) * 2020-01-21 2021-06-01 元大期貨股份有限公司 Network communication device for realizing high-frequency issuance of transaction data
CN115426078A (en) * 2022-08-29 2022-12-02 宁波奥克斯电气股份有限公司 Data transmission method, device, communication system and readable storage medium

Family Cites Families (26)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5133081A (en) * 1989-11-03 1992-07-21 Mayo Scott T Remotely controllable message broadcast system including central programming station, remote message transmitters and repeaters
GB9019488D0 (en) * 1990-09-06 1990-10-24 Ncr Co Local area network having a wireless transmission link
US5276703A (en) * 1992-01-13 1994-01-04 Windata, Inc. Wireless local area network communications system
US5444702A (en) * 1992-09-14 1995-08-22 Network Equipment Technologies, Inc. Virtual network using asynchronous transfer mode
FI98586C (en) * 1995-01-10 1997-07-10 Nokia Telecommunications Oy Packet radio system and methods for protocol-independent routing of a data packet in packet radio networks
US5638371A (en) * 1995-06-27 1997-06-10 Nec Usa, Inc. Multiservices medium access control protocol for wireless ATM system
JP3302578B2 (en) * 1996-10-21 2002-07-15 富士通株式会社 OAM processing equipment
GB9717868D0 (en) * 1997-08-23 1997-10-29 Philips Electronics Nv Wireless network
US6681315B1 (en) * 1997-11-26 2004-01-20 International Business Machines Corporation Method and apparatus for bit vector array
RU2201033C2 (en) * 1998-03-14 2003-03-20 Самсунг Электроникс Ко., Лтд. Device and method for exchanging messages of different-length frames in code-division multiple access communication system
CN1257382A (en) * 1998-07-24 2000-06-21 休斯电子公司 Frame formatting for aerial interface
CN1142657C (en) * 1998-10-05 2004-03-17 诺基亚网络有限公司 Frame control method and apparatus
US6731627B1 (en) * 1998-11-17 2004-05-04 Cisco Technology, Inc. Virtual loop carrier system
US6587441B1 (en) * 1999-01-22 2003-07-01 Technology Alternatives, Inc. Method and apparatus for transportation of data over a managed wireless network using unique communication protocol
US6542490B1 (en) * 1999-01-29 2003-04-01 Nortel Networks Limited Data link control proctocol for 3G wireless system
WO2000056113A1 (en) * 1999-03-17 2000-09-21 Nokia Networks Oy Internet protocol switch and method
WO2000064111A1 (en) * 1999-04-16 2000-10-26 Unifree, L.L.C. Media file distribution with adaptive transmission protocols
CN1149794C (en) * 1999-07-27 2004-05-12 信息产业部武汉邮电科学研究院 Interfacing apparatus and method for adapting ethernet directly to physical channel
US6721565B1 (en) * 2000-08-07 2004-04-13 Lucent Technologies Inc. Handover of wireless calls between systems supporting circuit and packet call models
US6795409B1 (en) * 2000-09-29 2004-09-21 Arraycomm, Inc. Cooperative polling in a wireless data communication system having smart antenna processing
EP1261183A1 (en) * 2001-05-23 2002-11-27 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Method and system for processing a data unit
US7280517B2 (en) * 2001-11-02 2007-10-09 At&T Corp. Wireless LANs and neighborhood capture
CN100417151C (en) * 2001-11-30 2008-09-03 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method and apparatus for realizing support circuit business in wireless access system
US7486693B2 (en) * 2001-12-14 2009-02-03 General Electric Company Time slot protocol
US20030162519A1 (en) * 2002-02-26 2003-08-28 Martin Smith Radio communications device
US6795419B2 (en) * 2002-03-13 2004-09-21 Nokia Corporation Wireless telecommunications system using multislot channel allocation for multimedia broadcast/multicast service

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8897216B2 (en) 2007-02-01 2014-11-25 Intel Corporation Method and apparatus for supporting AMD re-segmentation
US9774434B2 (en) 2007-02-01 2017-09-26 Intel Corporation Method and apparatus for supporting AMD re-segmentation
US9806867B2 (en) 2007-02-01 2017-10-31 Intel Corporation Method and apparatus for supporting AMD re-segmentation
US10382181B2 (en) 2007-02-01 2019-08-13 Intel Corporation Method and apparatus for supporting AMD re-segmentation

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW200536306A (en) 2005-11-01
TWI383302B (en) 2013-01-21
CN101860925B (en) 2013-03-27
CN102612076A (en) 2012-07-25
TWI380633B (en) 2012-12-21
CN102612076B (en) 2015-07-01
TWI385993B (en) 2013-02-11
TWI384793B (en) 2013-02-01
BRPI0415426A (en) 2006-12-05
CN101860925A (en) 2010-10-13
CN102571801B (en) 2015-09-09
CN1894914A (en) 2007-01-10
CN1894914B (en) 2010-06-16
TW200531489A (en) 2005-09-16
CN102571801A (en) 2012-07-11
TW200529619A (en) 2005-09-01
TWI387279B (en) 2013-02-21
TWI466517B (en) 2014-12-21
TW200527846A (en) 2005-08-16
TW200527868A (en) 2005-08-16
BRPI0415422A (en) 2006-12-05

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TW200525375A (en) Wireless LAN protocol stack
US8774098B2 (en) Method, apparatus, and system for multiplexing protocol data units
KR100814305B1 (en) Method, apparatus, and system for medium access control
US8582430B2 (en) Method and apparatus for wireless LAN (WLAN) data multiplexing
US9226308B2 (en) Method, apparatus, and system for medium access control
JP7321349B2 (en) Communication system, method and integrated circuit
JP7213192B2 (en) Reliable control signaling
JP2023071954A (en) Aggregate mpdu, transmission method of response frame to aggregate mpdu, and wireless communication terminal using aggregate mpdu
CN115804146A (en) Method and apparatus for wireless communication of low latency data between multilink devices
TW200830773A (en) Method and apparatus for keep-alive bits transmission